Owners Manual - Dealer E

Owners Manual - Dealer E
SECTION
1− 1
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Overview of instruments and controls
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument cluster overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center cluster overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
7
8
9
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument panel overview
View A
1. Side vents
2. Side defroster outlets
3. Instrument cluster
4. Center cluster
5. Garage door opener switches
6. Auxiliary boxes
7. Front personal lights, interior light
and/or electric moon roof switches
8. Center vents
9. Glove box
10. Power door lock switches
11. Power window switches
12. Trunk opener main switch
13. Rear console box
14. Rear vents
15. Power outlets
16. Seat ventilator/heater switches
17. Cup holder
18. Automatic transmission selector lever
19. Tire pressure warning reset switch
(On bottom of the instrument panel)
20. Hood lock release lever
21. Parking brake pedal
22. Window lock switch
23. Driving position memory switches
2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
View B (with key cylinder−type ignition switch)
1. Instrument panel light control knob
2. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
3. Audio remote control switches
4. Speech command switch (See the
separate “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.”)
5. Climate remote control switches
6. Wiper and washer switches
7. Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch
8. Emergency flasher switch
9. Audio system
10. Air conditioning controls
11. Cigarette lighter and ashtray, auxiliary
box, cassette player or navigation
system controller (For the navigation
system, see the separate “Navigation
System Owner’s Manual.”)
12. Ignition switch
13. Cruise control switch
14. Tilt steering lock release lever
15. Telescopic steering lock release lever
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
16. Glass breakage sensor
17. Trunk opener switch
18. Fuel filler door opener switch
19. Power rear view mirror control switches
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
View B (with smart key system)
1. Instrument panel light control knob
2. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
3. Audio remote control switches
4. Speech command switch (See the
separate “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.”)
5. Climate remote control switches
6. Wiper and washer switches
7. Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch
8. Emergency flasher switch
9. Audio system
10. Air conditioning controls
11. Cigarette lighter and ashtray, auxiliary
box, cassette player or navigation
system controller (For the navigation
system, see the separate “Navigation
System Owner’s Manual.”)
12. Ignition switch (engine switch)
13. Cruise control switch
14. Distance switch
15. Tilt steering lock release lever
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
16. Telescopic steering lock release lever
17. Glass breakage sensor
18. Rear electric sunshade switch
19. Trunk opener switch
20. Fuel filler door opener switch
21. Power rear view mirror control switches
6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument cluster overview
9. Automatic transmission shift range
position display
1. Engine coolant temperature gauge
5. Fuel gauge
2. Service reminder indicators and
indicator lights
6. Low fuel level warning light
7. Trip meter reset knob
10. Dynamic laser cruise control display
3. Tachometer
8. Odometer and two trip meters
11. Dynamic laser cruise control master
warning light
4. Speedometer
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Center cluster overview
1. Clock
2. Center display∗1
4. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights
3. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light∗2
5. Pattern selector knob (for center
display)
∗1 :
If your vehicle is equipped with navigation system, see the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
∗2 :
For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 145 in Section 1−6.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel
Open door warning light∗1
or
Brake system warning light∗1
SRS warning light∗1
or
Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1
Vehicle stability control system and traction
control system warning light∗1
Charging system warning light∗1
Low tire pressure warning light∗1
Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1
Low windshield washer fluid level warning
light∗1
Automatic headlight leveling system warning
light∗1
Malfunction indicator lamp∗1
Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1
Smart key system warning light∗1
or
Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1
Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent system
indicator light
9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
∗1 :
Headlight indicator light
∗2 :
Tail light indicator light
∗3 :
For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers” on page 145 in Section 1−6.
If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 176 in
Section 1−7.
If this light flashes, see “Dynamic laser cruise control” on
page 179 in Section 1−7.
Headlight high beam indicator light
Turn signal indicator lights
Automatic transmission indicator lights
Slip indicator/traction control system off light
Cruise control indicator light∗2 or dynamic laser
cruise control indicator light∗3
Dynamic laser cruise control ready mode
indicator light
Conventional cruise control mode indicator light
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
1− 2
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Keys and Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
16
18
27
34
41
44
48
49
51
52
11
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys (with key cylinder−type
ignition switch)
A transponder chip for engine immobilizer
system has been placed in the head of
the master and sub keys. These chips are
needed to enable the system to function
correctly, so be careful not to lose these
keys. If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system
or start the engine.
To protect items locked in the trunk or
glove box when using valet parking, leave
the sub key with the attendant.
Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds
of keys.
NOTICE
When using a key containing a transponder chip, observe the following
precautions:
1. Master keys (black)—These keys work
in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will
need one of them to make a new key
with a built−in transponder chip.
When starting the engine, do not
use the key with a key ring resting
on the key grip and do not press
the key ring against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts.
2. Sub key (gray)—This key will not work
in the locks of the glove box and the
door located behind the rear seat armrest.
12
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not cover the key grip with any
material that cuts off electromagnetic waves.
Do not knock the key hard against
other objects.
Do not leave the key exposed to
high temperatures for a long period,
such as on the dashboard and hood
under direct sunlight.
Do not put the key in water or
wash it in an ultrasonic washer.
When starting the engine, do not
use the key with other transponder
keys around (including keys of other vehicles) and do not press other
key plates against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts. If
this happens, remove the key once
and then insert it again after removing other transponder keys (including keys of other vehicles) from the
ring or while gripping or covering
them with your hand to start the
engine.
Do not bend the key grip.
Do not use the key with electromagnetic materials.
13
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys (with smart key system)
Spare keys should not be left in the
cabin. In the event that a spare key is
left in the cabin, the smart key system
will remain actuated even after the
doors have been locked. Under these
circumstances, the trunk can be opened
even after the driver has exited and
locked the vehicle, increasing the danger of theft. (Refer to “OPENING
TRUNK WITH SMART KEY SYSTEM” on
page 45 in this Section.)
KEY NUMBER PLATE
Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by a Toyota dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place.
The key consists of an electronic key
and a mechanical key. The mechanical
key is for emergency use. If the electronic key does not operate, you can
open the driver’s door using the mechanical key.
1. Electronic keys—These keys can lock
or unlock all the doors and can open
the trunk by using the wireless remote
control function or entry function of the
smart key system.
2. Mechanical keys—These keys can lock
or unlock the driver’s door, the glove
box and the door located behind the
rear seat armrest.
14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To protect items locked in the trunk or the
glove box when using valet parking, lock
the trunk opener switch and leave the
electronic key with the attendant. Keep the
mechanical key with you. For details about
locking the trunk opener switch, see
“—Luggage security system” on page 46
in this Section.
A transponder chip for engine immobilizer
system has been placed in the electronic
keys. These chips are needed to enable
the system to function correctly, so be
careful not to lose these keys.
CAUTION
NOTICE
People with implanted pacemakers
When using a electronic key containing a transponder chip, observe the
following precautions:
or cardiac defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system
antennas, because the radio waves
may affect the operation of such
devices. For the antenna locations
see “ANTENNA LOCATION” on page
29 in this Section.
Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information
about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves
could have unexpected effects on
the operation of such medical devices.
If necessary, the entry function can
be disabled. See “DISABLING THE
SMART KEY SYSTEM” on page 33
in this Section.
Do not affix any material that cuts
off electromagnetic waves (such as
a metal seal) on the electronic key.
Do not knock the electronic key
hard against other objects.
Do not leave the electronic key exposed to high temperatures for a
long period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight.
Do not put the electronic key in
water or wash it in an ultrasonic
washer.
USING A MECHANICAL KEY
When you use the mechanical key push
the release button and take out the mechanical key as shown. Be sure to put the
mechanical key back when not it use.
Do not keep the electronic key together with the products emitting
electromagnetic waves such as a
cellular phone.
15
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Engine immobilizer system
The engine immobilizer system is a
theft prevention system using an electronic code. The transponder chip in
the key has an electronic code and
transmits the code to the vehicle. Only
when the electronic code in the chip
corresponds to the register ID code for
the vehicle, the engine immobilizer system will be canceled and the engine
will start.
KEY NUMBER PLATE
The engine immobilizer system is automatically set when:
Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.
Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch—The key is removed from the ignition switch.
If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by Toyota dealer using the key
number.
Vehicles with smart key system—The ignition switch is turned off.
The indicator light will start flashing to
show that the system is set.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place.
16
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If any of the following indicator conditions
occur, contact your Toyota dealer.
The indicator light remains on.
The indicator light does not start flashing under the following situations.
Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch—When the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
Vehicles with smart key system—When
the ignition switch is turned off.
The indicator light flashes inconsistently.
The engine immobilizer system is automatically canceled when:
Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch—
You insert the key to the ignition switch.
For your Toyota dealer to make you a
new key with built−in transponder chip,
your dealer will need your key number
and master key (vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition switch) or electronic key
(vehicles with smart key system). However, there is a limit to the number of additional keys your Toyota dealer can make
for you.
NOTICE
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or
modifications are made, proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
Vehicles with smart key system—
You enter the vehicle carrying a key with
smart key system and press the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch (engine switch).
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZRI−21BTY
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB−1
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Even if the key battery is discharged, the
engine can be started. See “Smart key
system” on page 27 in this Section.
When the system is canceled, the indicator light will go off.
17
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Wireless remote control—
For vehicles sold in Canada
1. Lock switch
2. Unlock switch
This device complies with RSS−210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
3. Alarm switch
4. Trunk opener switch
5. Indicator light (vehicles with smart key
system only)
(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch
Vehicles with smart key system
18
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The wireless remote control function is
designed to lock or unlock all the
doors, open the trunk lid, or activate
the alarm from a distance within
approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.
When you operate any switch, push it
slowly and securely.
You can use up to 4 wireless remote control transmitters (for vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition switch) or 7 wireless
remote control transmitters (for vehicles
with smart key system) for the same vehicle. Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed information.
Vehicles with smart key system only—
When the switch is operated, the indicator
light flashes once. If not, the battery may
be discharged. Replace the battery at the
earliest opportunity.
If the wireless remote control transmitter
does not actuate the doors, or does not
operate from a normal distance, or if the
indicator on the transmitter is dimmed or
does not come on:
The wireless remote control transmitter is
an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause
damage the key.
mitter such as a radio station or an
airport which can interfere with normal
operation of the transmitter.
Do not leave the transmitter in places
where the temperature becomes high
such as on the dashboard.
Do not disassemble it.
Avoid knocking it hard against other
objects or dropping it.
Avoid putting it in water.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Check for closeness to a radio trans-
The battery may have been consumed.
Check the battery in the transmitter. To
replace the battery, see “—Replacing
battery” on pages 24 or 25 in this Section.
If you lose your transmitter, contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident. (See “If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter” on page 332 in
Section 4.)
19
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Locking and unlocking
doors
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Locking operation (vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition switch)
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Unlocking operation (vehicles with key
cylinder−type ignition switch)
20
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To lock or unlock all the doors, push
the switches slowly and securely.
To lock: Push the lock switch. All the
doors are locked simultaneously. At this
time one beep will sound and turn signal
lights flash once.
Vehicles with smart key system—For 3
seconds after the doors have been locked,
the doors cannot be re−unlocked via the
smart key system.
Check to see that the doors are securely
locked.
Locking operation (vehicles with smart
key system)
If any of the doors is not securely closed,
or if the key is in the ignition switch (vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch) or key left in the vehicle (vehicles
with smart key system), locking cannot be
performed by the lock switch and a beep
will sound continuously for 10 seconds.
To stop the beep, take out the key from
the vehicle or push the unlock switch.
To unlock: Push the unlock switch once to
unlock the driver’s door alone. Pushing
the switch twice within 3 seconds unlocks
all the doors simultaneously. Each time
the unlock switch is pushed, two beeps
will sound and turn signal lights flash
twice.
This double switch operation to unlock all
doors can be changed to a single switch
operation. For details, contact your Toyota
dealer.
If the key is in the ignition (vehicles with
key cylinder−type ignition switch) or the
ignition switch is set to ACC or ON (vehicles with smart key system), the vehicle
cannot be unlocked via the unlock switch.
When all the doors are unlocked simultaneously with a key, wireless remote control or entry function of the smart key
system, the following lights come on for
about 15 seconds and then fade out, even
if the door is not opened.
Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch—Ignition switch light, interior light,
front personal lights and rear personal
lights
Vehicles with smart key system—Interior
light, front personal lights, rear personal
lights and exterior foot lights
Unlocking operation (vehicles with smart
key system)
21
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Opening trunk lid
(For further information, see “Illuminated
entry system” on page 135 in Section
1−5.)
The following adjustments can be made in
this system. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
You have 30 seconds to open a door after
using the wireless remote unlock feature.
If a door is not opened by then, all the
doors will be automatically locked again.
Cancelling the wireless door locking or
If the wireless remote control is used to
lock the doors near the window or door
handle, there is a possibility that the door
may not unlocked by entry function of
smart key system. Under these circumstances, use the wireless remote control
to unlock the doors.
Cancelling the beep sound
unlocking function
Cancelling the flash of the turn signal
lights
Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch
The time before automatic door lock function can be changed. For details, contact
your Toyota dealer.
If the lock or unlock switch is kept
pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the switch
and then push again.
Vehicles with smart key system
22
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Activating alarm
To open the trunk lid, push the trunk
opener switch of the transmitter for 1
second. A long beep will sound.
Pushing the alarm switch for 1 second
blows the horn intermittently and
flashes the headlights, turn signal
lights, tail lights and interior light.
If the key is in the ignition (vehicles with
key cylinder−type ignition switch) or the
ignition switch is set at ACC or ON (vehicles with smart key system), the trunk
lid cannot be opened by the trunk opener
switch.
Vehicles
with
smart
key
system
only—When pushing the switch, the indicator light flashes.
The alarm switch is used to deter vehicle
theft when you witness anyone attempting
to break into or damage your vehicle.
Opening of the trunk lid with the wireless
remote control can be changed as follows.
Contact your Toyota dealer for details.
Trunk lid opens by pushing the trunk
opener switch twice in succession.
Trunk lid opens by pushing the trunk
Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch
The alarm will last for one minute. To stop
the alarm midway, push the switch once
again, unlock a door with the transmitter,
or set the ignition switch to ON.
If the key is in the ignition (vehicles with
key cylinder−type ignition switch) or the
ignition switch is set at ACC or ON (vehicles with smart key system), the alarm
does not work.
opener switch once regardless of how
long the switch is being pressed.
Opening of the trunk lid is disabled
using the wireless remote control transmitter.
This alarm function can be disabled. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.
Vehicles with smart key system
23
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Replacing battery
(with key cylinder−type
ignition switch)
For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium
battery or equivalent.
CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing
the removed transmitter battery or
components.
NOTICE
When replacing the transmitter battery, be careful not to lose the components.
Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.
1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the
transmitter case.
2. Remove the circuit board, then remove
the discharged transmitter battery.
NOTICE
Take care not to damage the circuit
board.
Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
Do not bend the terminals.
Replace the transmitter battery by following these procedures:
24
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Replacing battery
(with smart key system)
Be careful not to bend the electrode
when inserting the transmitter battery and that dust or oils do not
adhere to the transmitter case.
Close the transmitter case securely.
After replacing the battery, check that the
transmitter operates properly. If the transmitter still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.
3. Put in a new transmitter battery with
positive (+) side up. Install the circuit
board into the transmitter case.
The transmitter can easily be damaged
when replacing the battery. We recommend having the battery replaced by your
Toyota dealer. If you have to do it yourself, use a CR1632 lithium battery or
equivalent and a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing
the removed transmitter battery or
components.
NOTICE
Be careful not to touch the circuit,
as this may generate static electricity that can damage the transmitter.
Close the transmitter case securely.
NOTICE
When replacing the transmitter battery, be careful not to lose the components.
Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the transmitter battery are faced correctly.
Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.
Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
rust.
Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
Do not touch or move any components inside the transmitter, or it
may interfere with proper operation.
Replace the transmitter battery by following these procedures:
25
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Push the release button and take out
the mechanical key.
2. Using a flathead screwdriver or equivalent, open the transmitter case.
3. Remove the discharged transmitter battery by flathead screwdriver or equivalent. Insert the guide groove and lift as
shown in the above illustration.
NOTICE
Do not modify the battery case. It
may cause a trouble.
26
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Smart key system
NOTICE
4. Put in a new battery with the positive
(+) side up. Install the cover and insert
the mechanical key into the transmitter.
Close the transmitter case securely.
The smart key system consists mainly
of the following functions.
Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the battery are
faced correctly.
Engine immobilizer function (For de-
Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
rust.
Wireless remote control function (For
Do not touch or move any components inside the transmitter, or it
may interfere with proper operation.
Push button start function (For details,
Be careful not to bend the electrode
when inserting the transmitter battery and that dust or oils do not
adhere to the case.
Entry function and start function (See
Close the transmitter case securely.
LOCK FUNCTION” described below.)
tails, see “Engine immobilizer system”
on page 16 in this Section.)
details, see “Wireless remote control”
on page 18 in this Section.)
see “How to start the engine” on page
296 in Section 3.)
“ENTRY
FUNCTION
AND
FUNCTION” described below.)
START
Steering lock function (See “STEERING
After replacing the battery, check that the
transmitter operates properly. If the transmitter still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.
27
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
ENTRY
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
CAUTION
START
By carrying the key, you can lock and
unlock the doors and start the engine.
People with implanted pacemakers
or cardiac defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system
antennas, because the radio waves
may affect the operation of such
devices. For the antenna locations
see “ANTENNA LOCATION” on page
29 in this Section.
Entry function—You can lock and unlock
the doors and open the trunk without inserting the key in the keyhole. For further
information, see “Side doors” on page 34
and “Trunk lid” on page 44 in this Section.
Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information
about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves
could have unexpected effects on
the operation of such medical devices.
AND
Entry function
If necessary, the entry function can
be disabled. See “DISABLING THE
SMART KEY SYSTEM” on page 33
in this Section.
Start function
28
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Start function—You can shift the power
supply mode and start the engine when
the electronic key is in the vehicle. For
further information, see “Ignition switch”
on page 159 in Section 1−7 and “How to
start the engine ”on page 296 in Section
3.
STEERING LOCK FUNCTION
ANTENNA LOCATION
When the driver’s door is opened after
turning off the engine, the steering wheel
will lock.
1. Antenna inside cabin and trunk
2. Antenna outside cabin and trunk
The steering lock is automatically unlocked when the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch (engine switch) is pressed. If the
indicator light on the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch flashes green, this indicates
that the steering wheel remains locked. If
the amber indicator light flashes, this indicates that the steering lock is malfunctioning. For details, see “How to start the
engine” on page 296 and “Driving and
parking using smart key system” on page
300 in Section 3.
29
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Start function actuation area—Inside
of the cabin.
When the electronic key is near a
The start function may not be activated
if the key is on the instrument panel,
on the package tray, in the glove box
or on the floor, etc.
When you are carrying an electronic
In the following cases, the smart key system may not operate properly.
Depending on the position of the key
When facilities issuing strong electromagnetic waves such as TV towers,
electric power stations, broad casting
stations are nearby.
ACTUATION AREA
The entry function and start function
are available to use when a registered
key is in the actuation area.
1. Entry function actuation area—About
1 m (3 ft.) from each outside door
handle and trunk opener switch.
If the key is close to a door handle,
a window, the center of the rear bumper, on the ground or above the roof,
the entry function may not operate
properly.
In places where automated payment facilities are installed (such as gas stations).
When you are carrying an electronic
key together with a mobile communications system such as a two−way radio
or cellular phone.
When the electronic key is in contact
with or covered by a metallic object.
When another person is operating a
wireless remote control function
another vehicle near your vehicle.
on
When the battery is discharged. To replace the battery, see “—Replacing battery” on page 25 in this Section.
30
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
high−voltage or noise−emitting device.
key together with a key for another
smart key system equipped vehicle or
another
instrument
emitting
radio
waves.
or vehicle body shape the key may not
work well even within the actuation
area.
When the key surface is covered by a
sticker, etc. that may cut off electromagnetic wave.
If the smart key system does not operate properly and you cannot enter, you
can lock and unlock all the doors by
using mechanical key attached to the
master key or wireless remote control
function.
However the engine can be started in the
following procedures.
1. While the brake pedal is depressed,
touch the Toyota logo side of the
electronic key to the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
2. Start the engine within 5 seconds after
the green indicator light on the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch comes
on and a buzzer sounds.
BATTERY POWER SAVING
STARTING THE ENGINE WHEN
ELECTRONIC
KEY
BATTERY
DISCHARGED
THE
IS
If the key indicator does not flash and
the engine cannot be started by using
the start function, the battery may be
discharged. Replace the key battery as
soon as possible. (See “—Replacing
battery” on page 25 in this Section.)
Both the vehicle and key transmitters are
always sending signals to each other. To
prevent the batteries from being discharged, the smart key system is automatically deactivated in the following conditions:
If the electronic key is left outside of
the vehicle and within the effective
range of the entry function actuation
area for more than 10 minutes.
The key and the vehicle are communicating even while the vehicle is not being
driven. Do not leave the key near the
vehicle (within 2 m [7 ft.]).
The vehicle battery may drain if the
vehicle is not used for a long period of
time. To prevent battery drain, disconnect
the battery negative (−) terminal or disable
the smart key system. (For details about
disable the smart key system, see
“DISABLING THE SMART KEY SYSTEM”
on page 33 in this Section.)
If the battery is disconnected, the power
window and moon roof may not operate
automatically and the jam protection function will not function correctly after you
reconnect. In this case, you should
normalize each system. To normalize
them, see “Power windows” on page 41
and “Electric moon roof” on page 52 in
Section 1−2.
If the door lock or unlock operation is
not performed more than 2 weeks.
31
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To reactivate the smart key system, perform any of the following:
(a) Press the lock button on the outside
front door handle while carrying the
electronic key.
(b) Perform a wireless remote control operation.
(c) Insert and turn the mechanical key in
the keyhole of the driver’s door.
If the electronic key receives strong electromagnetic waves over a period of time,
the battery can be drastically run down.
You should always keep the at least 1 m
(3 ft.) away from the electronic key following electrical appliances.
TV
Personal computer
Cellular phone
Cordless phone recharger unit
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF−1
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS−210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Electric light stand
Fluorescent desk light
32
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DISABLING THE SMART KEY SYSTEM
The following functions can be disabled:
A function that allows you to lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk by
simply carrying a key
A function that causes the vehicle to
beep if keys are forgotten inside the
vehicle or trunk and a door is closed
A function that recalls the position of
the driver’s seat and outside rear view
mirrors
A function that shifts the power supply
mode and starts the engine when the
electronic key is in the vehicle.
Warning lights and buzzers
For details, contact your Toyota dealer.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
If the smart key system does not operate properly because of a system malfunction, consult your Toyota dealer.
Make sure to bring all of the keys. They
may be necessary to repair the system.
33
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Side doors—
—Locking and unlocking with
key
—Locking and unlocking with
smart key system
Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
it.
To lock: Turn the key forward.
To unlock: Turn the key backward.
All the doors lock and unlock simultaneously with the driver’s door. In the driver’s door lock, turning the key once will
unlock the driver’s door and twice in succession will unlock all the doors simultaneously.
Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch
This double key turning operation to unlock all the doors can be changed to a
single key turning operation. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.
Vehicles with smart key system—For 3
seconds after the doors have been locked,
the doors cannot be re−unlocked via the
smart key system.
When you unlock the doors, the illuminated entry system will be activated. (For
further information, see “Illuminated entry
system” on page 135 in Section 1−5.)
Vehicles with smart key system
34
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When you carry the registered key with
smart key system into the actuation area,
you can lock and unlock the side doors
without using the key. For further information of actuation area, see “Smart key
system” on page 27 in this Section.
When the engine is not turned off. A
beep will sound continuously for 2 seconds.
When the key is left in the vehicle. A
beep will sound continuously for 2 seconds.
When attempting to lock the doors with
the key near a window or a door handle. A beep will sound continuously for
2 seconds.
The beep may not sound if the key is on
the instrument panel, on the package tray,
in the glove box or on the floor, etc.
Locking operation
Unlocking operation
Push the lock button on the outside
door handle slowly and firmly. All the
doors lock simultaneously. At this time
one beep will be heard and turn signal
lights flash once.
Grasp the outside door handle (sensors
are located on the underside of the
door handles). Only the driver’s door
unlocks when the driver’s door handle
is grasped. All the doors unlock when
any door handle other than the driver’s
door handle is grasped. At this time
two beeps will be heard and the turn
signal lights flash twice.
In the following cases, you cannot be
locked by pushing the lock button and a
beep will sound as an indicator.
When any of the doors is not securely
The doors may not unlock if the handle
is grasped too quickly. Be sure to confirm
that the doors are unlocked before pulling
the door handle. If the doors do not open
when the handle is pulled, return the handle to its original position.
closed. A beep will sound continuously
for 10 seconds.
When the lock switch is pressed while
opening or closing the door. A beep
will sound continuously for 10 seconds.
35
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Wearing gloves may slow response time.
For 3 seconds after the doors have been
locked, the doors cannot be re−unlocked
via the smart key system.
When you enter the entry function actuation area, the interior and exterior lights
come on for about 15 seconds. After the
lights come on, all the side doors can be
unlocked by grasping the outside door
handle.
You have 30 seconds to open a door after
using the unlocking function. If a door is
not opened by then, all the doors will be
automatically locked again.
The doors may unlock if the key is within
the entry function actuation area and a
large amount of water splashes on the
door handle (for example, in the rain or
in a car wash).
SELECTING DOORS TO BE UNLOCKED
WITH ENTRY FUNCTION
The unlock operation has 2 modes. To
change the mode, within 1 m (3 ft.) of
the vehicle press the lock switch and
the alarm, the trunk opener or unlock
switch simultaneously for 5 seconds.
In order to change unlock modes, the ignition switch must be turned off.
Repeating this procedure allows you to
toggle between the following 2 modes:
1. Driver’s door only (default)—In this
mode, only the driver’s door unlocks
when the driver’s door handle is
grasped. All the doors unlock when any
door handle other than the driver’s
door handle is grasped. When the setting is complete, you will hear two
beeps.
When you unlock the doors, the illuminated entry system will be activated. (For
further information, see “Illuminated entry
system” on page 135 in Section 1−5.)
36
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. All doors—In this mode, all doors (except the trunk) unlocks when any of
the door handles is grasped. When the
setting is complete, you will hear two
beeps.
After the mode change operation is complete, wait 5 seconds before repeating the
operation.
—Locking and unlocking with
inside lock knob
—Locking and unlocking with
power door lock switch
Closing the door with the lock knob in the
lock position will also lock the door. Be
careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.
Doors cannot be locked when either front
door is open and the key is in the ignition
(vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch) or key is left in the vehicle (vehicles with smart key system).
Driver’s side
Move the lock knob.
To lock: Push the knob forward.
To unlock: Pull the knob backward.
The front doors can be opened by pulling
the inside handle even if the lock knobs
are in the locked position.
CAUTION
Do not pull the inside handle of the
doors while driving. The doors will
open and an accident may occur.
Toyota strongly recommends that all
children be placed in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
Passenger’s side
37
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Automatic door locking and
unlocking functions
Push the switch.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING
To lock: Push the switch down on the
front side.
To unlock: Push the switch down on the
rear side.
You can select the following functions:
All the doors lock or unlock simultaneously.
When the front doors are locked from the
outside or locked with the wireless remote
control transmitter, the power door lock
switch will not work until either front door
is unlocked with the key, lock knob, or
wireless remote control transmitter.
If the vehicle is subjected to a severe
frontal, rear or side impact with the ignition switch set at ON, all doors will unlock
automatically after a few seconds.
Locking linked with the shift position
All doors are automatically locked when
the selector lever is moved out of “P”
position.
Locking linked with vehicle speed
To select the locking linked with the
shift position:
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition
switch to ON.
2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
All doors are automatically locked when
the vehicle speed goes above about 20
km/h (12 mph).
3. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition switch to ON, press and hold the
driver’s side power door lock switch in
the lock position for 5 seconds and
then release.
You can set or cancel the automatic
door locking functions:
The doors will be locked and unlocked
to indicate that the function is set.
Be sure to apply the parking brake when
performing the following operations.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
38
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To select the locking linked with the
vehicle speed:
AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition
switch to ON.
Unlocking linked with the shift posi-
2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the
“N” position.
All doors are automatically unlocked
when the selector lever is moved to
“P” position.
3. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition switch to ON, press and hold the
driver’s side power door lock switch in
the lock position for 5 seconds and
then release.
You can select the following functions:
tion
Unlocking linked with the ignition
switch
The doors will be locked and unlocked
to indicate that the function is set.
All doors are automatically unlocked
when the driver’s door is opened within
10 seconds after the ignition switch is
set from ON to ACC or OFF.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
You can set or cancel the automatic
door unlocking functions:
To select the unlocking linked with the
shift position:
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition
switch to ON.
2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
3. Within 10 seconds
tion switch to ON,
driver’s side power
the unlock position
then release.
of turning the ignipress and hold the
door lock switch in
for 5 seconds and
The doors will be locked and unlocked
to indicate that the function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
Be sure to apply the parking brake when
performing the following operations.
39
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Rear door child−protectors
To select the unlocking linked with the
ignition switch:
CAUTION
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition
switch to ON.
Before driving, be sure that the doors
are closed and locked, especially
when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of
seat belts, locking the doors helps
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the vehicle in an accident. It also helps prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.
2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the
“N” position.
3. Within 10 seconds
tion switch to ON,
driver’s side power
the unlock position
then release.
of turning the ignipress and hold the
door lock switch in
for 5 seconds and
The doors will be locked and unlocked
to indicate that the function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
Move the lock knob to the “LOCK”
position as shown on the label.
When the child−protector is locked, you
cannot open the rear door by the inside
door handle. We recommend using this
feature whenever small children are in the
vehicle.
40
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Power windows
Window lock switch
The windows can be operated with the
switch on each door.
The power windows work when the ignition
switch is set at ON.
Key off operation: If both front doors are
closed, it works for 43 seconds even after
the ignition switch is turned off. It stops
working when either front door is opened.
OPERATING THE FRONT WINDOWS
Use the switches on the driver’s door
and front passenger’s door.
Driver’s door switches
Normal operation: The window moves as
long as you hold the switch.
Driver’s door switches
To open: Lightly push down the switch.
To close: Lightly pull up the switch.
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the passenger’s window
cannot be operated.
The indicator lights on the switch tell you
which of the switches can be operated.
Front passenger’s door switch
Front passenger’s door switch
41
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic operation: Push the switch
completely down or pull it completely up,
and then release it. The window will fully
open or close. To stop the window partway, lightly move the switch in the opposite direction and then release it.
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the front passenger’s
window cannot be operated.
If the power window does not operate
automatically or the jam protection
function does not operate correctly, you
should normalize the power window.
To normalize the power window:
1. Push down the power window switches
of each front door and lower the windows halfway.
The indicator lights on the switch tell you
which of the switches can be operated.
2. Pull up the switches until the windows
close and hold the switches for 1 second.
Jam protection function: If something
gets caught between the window and window frame, during automatic closing operation or key off closing operation, the
window stops and opens half way.
Make sure that the windows open and
close automatically. If the power windows
cannot be operated properly, have it
checked by your Toyota dealer.
If the window receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.
42
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
Never try jamming any part of your
body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally, as it could result in a death or serious injury.
The jam protection function may
not work if something gets caught
just before the window is fully
closed.
OPERATING THE REAR WINDOWS
Use the switch on each rear doors or
the switches on the driver’s door that
control rear passengers’ windows.
The window moves as long as you hold
the switch.
To open: Push down the switch.
To close: Pull up the switch.
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the passengers’ windows
cannot be operated.
CAUTION
To avoid death or serious personal injury, you must do the following.
Before you close the power windows, always make sure there is
nobody around the power windows.
You must also make sure the
heads, hands and other parts of the
bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in a closing window, it
could result in death or serious injury. When anyone closes the power
windows, make sure he or she operates the windows safely.
When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power
window switches without supervision. Use the window lock switch to
prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches.
Be sure to carry the key when you
leave your vehicle.
43
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Trunk lid—
Never leave anyone (particularly a
CAUTION
small child) alone in your vehicle,
with the key left in the vehicle.
Otherwise, he/she could use the
power window switches and get
trapped in a window. Unattended
person (particularly a small child)
can be involved in a serious accident.
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. This not only keeps the luggage
from being thrown out but also prevents exhaust gases from entering
the vehicle.
To open the trunk lid from the driver’s
seat, push the trunk opener switch.
See “Cargo and luggage” on page 290 in
Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.
To close the trunk lid, lower it and press
down on it. After closing the trunk lid, try
pulling it up to make sure it is securely
closed.
To deactivate this lock release switch from
opening the trunk lid, see “—Trunk opener
main switch” described below.
The trunk lid can be opened with the wireless remote control transmitter, see
“—Opening trunk lid” on page 22 in this
Section.
44
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Trunk opener main switch
A warning buzzer may sound when:
The key is brought into the cabin after
the trunk is opened, and the trunk is
then closed.
The key is near the trunk when the
trunk is closed.
The buzzer may sound even when the key
is not in the trunk. This does not indicate
a problem. However, under these circumstances, the trunk cannot be opened using
the smart key system. Open the trunk
using other methods.
OPENING
SYSTEM
TRUNK
WITH
SMART
KEY
When you carry the registered key into
the actuation area, the trunk can be
opened. For further information of actuation area, see “Smart key system” on
page 27 in this Section.
If you left the key in the trunk and close
it when all side doors are locked, a beep
will sound continuously for 2 seconds. You
can open the trunk pushing the trunk
opener switch without carrying another
key. However, in some instances, the
beep may not sound when the trunk is
closed depending on the location of the
key in the trunk. In addition, when the
doors are open or unlocked, the beep may
not sound when the trunk is closed. When
closing the trunk, make sure that the key
is not left in it.
On
Off
If you do not want to activate the trunk
lid opener system, turn off the trunk
opener main switch in the glove box.
To turn it on, push in the trunk opener
main switch again.
45
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—In case the trunk opener is
not actuated
1. Pull down the rear armrest and open
the door behind it.
—Luggage security system
2. Pull the loop of wire to unlock the
trunk lid.
This is used in case the trunk lid cannot
be unlocked due to a discharged battery
or other trouble.
46
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
This system helps protect things locked
in the trunk by safeguarding the trunk
opener main switch from unwanted access.
1. To cancel the trunk opener switch,
turn off the trunk opener main
switch in the glove box.
—Internal trunk release strap
2. After closing the glove box lid, insert the master key (vehicles with
key cylinder−type ignition switch) or
mechanical key (vehicles with smart
key system) and turn it clockwise to
safeguard the lock release switch.
3. After closing the door located behind
the rear seat armrest, insert the
master key (vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition switch) or mechanical key (vehicles with smart key system) and turn it clockwise to lock
the door.
After closing the trunk lid, try pulling it up
to make sure it is securely locked.
If a person is locked in the trunk,
he/she can pull down the phosphorescent strap on the inside of trunk lid to
open the trunk lid.
The phosphorescent (glow−in−the−dark)
strap will continue to glow for a time after
the trunk lid is closed. Exposing the strap
to stronger light will cause it to glow longer.
47
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Hood
CAUTION
Always lock the trunk lid and all
doors, and keep away the vehicle
keys out of children’s reach.
Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle. Unsupervised children
may lock themselves in the vehicle
or trunk and suffer serious injuries
or death.
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The
hood will spring up slightly.
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood
is closed and securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while driving and an accident may
occur.
48
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the
hood.
Before closing the hood, check to see that
you have not forgotten any tools, rags,
etc. Then lower the hood and make sure
it locks into place. If necessary, press
down gently on the front edge to lock it.
Theft deterrent system
SETTING THE SYSTEM
1. Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch—The key is removed from the
ignition switch.
Vehicles with smart key system—The
ignition switch is turned off.
The engine immobilizer system is set and
the indicator light will start flashing. (For
details, see “Engine immobilizer system”
on page 16 in this Section.)
2. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle.
To deter vehicle theft, the system is
designed to sound an alarm if any of
the doors, trunk or hood is forcibly unlocked or the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected when the
vehicle is locked.
Indicator light
3. Close and lock all the doors, trunk and
hood.
The indicator light will remain on when all
the doors, trunk and hood are closed and
locked.
The theft deterrent system will automatically be set after 30 seconds. When the
system is set, the indicator light will start
flashing again.
The alarm also sounds, when someone
attempts to break the side windows.
The alarm blows the horn intermittently
and flashes the headlights, turn signal
lights, tail lights and interior light.
4. After making sure the indicator light
starts flashing, you may leave the vehicle.
Glass breakage sensor
Never leave anyone in the vehicle when
you set the system, because unlocking
from the inside will activate the system.
49
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET
Activating the system
The system will sound the alarm under
the following conditions:
If any of the doors is unlocked or if
the trunk or hood is forcibly opened
without the key, wireless remote control
or entry function of the smart key system.
If the battery terminal is disconnected
and then reconnected.
If the ignition is hotwired.
Vehicles with the glass breakage sensor—
The side windows are tapped or broken.
The indicator light will come on when the
system is activated.
All the doors will be automatically locked
again when the following two conditions
are met:
If any of the doors is unlocked without
the key, wireless remote control or
entry function of the smart key system.
If the key is not in the ignition switch
(vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch) or the ignition switch is set to
off (vehicles with smart key system).
After one minute, the alarm will automatically stop and the indicator light will start
flashing again.
Reactivating the alarm
Once set, the system automatically resets
the alarm after the alarm stops.
The alarm will activate again under the
same
circumstances
described
in
“Activating the system”.
Stopping the alarm
The alarm will be stopped by the following
three ways:
Set the ignition switch to ON.
Unlock any of the doors with the key,
wireless remote control or entry function of the smart key system.
Open the trunk with the wireless remote control or entry function of the
smart key system.
CANCELLING THE SYSTEM
The system will be cancelled
above mentioned 3 ways.
by
the
If the tail lights come on for 2 seconds,
the theft deterrent system has been
alarmed. Check to see if there is any
abnormality with your vehicle.
50
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
TESTING THE SYSTEM
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described above.
The doors should be locked with the
key, wireless remote control or entry
function of the smart key system. Be
sure to wait until the indicator light
starts flashing.
3. Unlock any door from the inside. The
system should activate the alarm.
4. Stop the alarm as described above.
5. Repeat this operation for the other
doors, trunk and hood. When testing
the hood, also check that the system
is activated when the battery terminal
is disconnected and then reconnected.
If the system does not work properly,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
Fuel tank cap
This indicates that the fuel filler door
is on the left side of your vehicle.
1. To open the fuel filler door, push the
opener switch.
When refueling, turn off the engine.
CAUTION
Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-
2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn
the cap slowly counterclockwise,
then pause slightly before removing
it.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh
when the cap is opened.
low open flames when refueling.
The fumes are flammable.
When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could cause
injury by spraying out of the filler
neck if the cap is suddenly removed.
51
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Electric moon roof
CAUTION
Make sure the cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in
the event of an accident.
Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank
cap for replacement. It is designed
to regulate fuel tank pressure.
NOTICE
3. The removed cap can be stored on
the back side of the fuel filler door.
To prevent damage to the cap, apply
force only in the turning direction to
the cap. Do not pull or pry it.
Sliding operation
When installing the cap, turn the cap
clockwise until you hear a click. When
you hear the click, the cap is fully closed.
If the cap is not installed securely, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
Tilting operation
52
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To operate the moon roof, use the
switch between the personal lights.
The moon roof works when the ignition
switch is set at ON.
Tilting operation—
To tilt up: Push and hold the switch for
1 second on the “TILT UP” side.
Sliding operation—
The roof will fully tilt up automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push the switch on
either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”
side briefly.
To open: Push and hold the switch for 1
second on the “SLIDE OPEN” side.
To tilt down: Push and hold the switch for
1 second on the “SLIDE OPEN” side.
The roof will open and stop partway 50
mm (2.0 in.) from the fully opened position. When you push the “SLIDE OPEN”
side again, the moon roof will open fully.
To stop the roof partway, push the switch
on either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”
side briefly.
The roof will fully tilt down automatically.
To stop the roof partway, push the switch
on either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”
side briefly.
The sunshade can be opened or closed
by hand.
As driving with the moon roof opened fully
will cause wind throbs, we recommend
you to drive with the moon roof partway
50 mm (2.0 in.) from the fully opened
position.
The sunshade will be opened together with
the roof.
To close: Push and hold the switch for 1
second on the “TILT UP” side.
If the moon roof does not operate automatically or the jam protection function
does not operate correctly, you should
normalize the moon roof.
To normalize the moon roof, push and
hold the switch on the “TILT UP” side until
the moon roof tilts all the way up and
then tilts down a little automatically.
Make sure that the moon roof opens and
closes automatically. If the moon roof cannot be operated properly, have it checked
by your Toyota dealer.
Key off operation: If both front doors are
closed, the moon roof works for 43 seconds even after the ignition switch is
turned off. It stops working when either
door is opened.
Jam protection function: If something
gets caught between the moon roof and
frame during closing operation, the moon
roof stops and opens half way.
If the moon roof receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.
The roof will fully close automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push the switch on
either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”
side briefly.
53
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
To avoid death or serious personal
injury, you must do the following.
While the vehicle is moving, always
keep the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could be killed or seriously injured if the vehicle stops
suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Before you close the moon roof,
always make sure there is nobody
around the moon roof. You must
also make sure nobody places his
or her head, hands and other parts
of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in the closing roof, it could
result in death or serious injury.
When anyone closes the moon roof,
first make sure it is safe to do so.
Never leave anyone (particularly a
small child) alone in your vehicle,
with the key left in the vehicle.
Otherwise, he/she could use the
moon roof switches and get trapped
in the roof opening. Unattended
person (particularly a small child)
can be involved in a serious accident.
Never sit on top of the vehicle
around the roof opening.
Never try jamming any part of your
body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally, as it could result in a death or serious injury.
The jam protection function may
not work if something gets caught
just before the moon roof is fully
closed.
Be sure to carry the key when you
leave your vehicle.
54
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
1− 3
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk storage extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat ventilators/heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
56
60
63
64
65
65
66
68
79
98
55
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Front seats—
—Front seat precautions
Seats
While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should have the seatback
upright, sit well back in the seat and properly wear the seat belts provided.
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle unless the
occupants are properly seated. Do
not allow any passengers to sit in
the luggage compartment or cargo
area. Persons not properly seated
and/or not properly restrained by
seat belts can be killed or severely
injured in the event of emergency
braking or a collision.
During driving, do not allow any
passengers to stand up or move
around between seats. Otherwise,
death or severe injuries can occur
in the event of emergency braking
or a collision.
Driver seat
Slightly recline the back of the
CAUTION
The SRS driver airbag deploys with
considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if
the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag
is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of
inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10
in.) from your driver airbag provides
you with a clear margin of safety.
This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your
breastbone. If you sit less than 250
mm (10 in.) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:
Move your seat to the rear as far
as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
56
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the 250
mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the
seat somewhat. If reclining the back
of your seat makes it hard to see
the road, raise yourself by using a
firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise
the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.
If your steering wheel is adjustable,
tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of
your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot
pedals, steering wheel, and your view
of the instrument panel controls.
—Seat adjustment precautions
Front passenger seat
Front seats (with SRS side airbags)
CAUTION
CAUTION
The SRS front passenger airbag
The SRS side airbags are installed in
the driver and front passenger seats.
Observe the following precautions.
also deploys with considerable
force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front
passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat
should be as far from the airbag as
possible with the seatback adjusted,
so the front passenger sits upright.
Do not lean against the front door
when the vehicle is in use, since
the side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise,
you may be killed or seriously injured.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the seat while the
vehicle is moving as the seat may
unexpectedly move and cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.
After adjusting the seat position, release the lever and try sliding the
seat forward and backward to make
sure it is locked in position.
Do not use seat accessories which
After adjusting the seatback, push
cover the area where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.
your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.
Do not modify or replace the seats
or upholstery of the seats with side
airbags. Such change may prevent
the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system, or
cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not put objects under the seats.
Otherwise, the objects may interfere
with the seat−lock mechanism or
unexpectedly push up the seat position adjusting lever and the seat
may suddenly move, causing the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
While adjusting the seat, do not put
your hands under the seat or near
the moving parts. Otherwise, your
hands or fingers may be caught and
injured.
57
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Adjusting front seats
(manual seat)
1. SEATBACK
LEVER
NOTICE
Do not operate the control switch in
more than one dimension at a time.
It may cause electrical overload.
ANGLE
ADJUSTING
Lean forward and pull the lever up.
Then lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever.
CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and
the front passenger are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats. If
you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death
or serious injury.
2. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER
Hold the center of the lever and pull it
up. Then slide the seat to the desired
position with slight body pressure and
release the lever.
58
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Adjusting front seats (power
seat)
1. SEAT LEG SUPPORT ADJUSTING
SWITCH (some models on driver’s
side)
Operating this switch raises the front
edge of the seat cushion.
Push the switch on either side.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat
cushion at that position.
Do not place anything under the front
seats, as this might interfere with the seat
movement.
2. SEAT POSITION AND SEAT CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH (driver’s
side only)
Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat at
that position.
Do not place anything under the front
seats, as this might interfere with the seat
movement.
3. SEATBACK
SWITCH
ANGLE
ADJUSTING
CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and
the front passenger are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats. If
you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death
or serious injury.
4. SEAT
LUMBAR
ADJUSTING SWITCH
only)
SUPPORT
(driver’s side
Push the switch on either side.
The amount of lumbar support will change
while the switch is pushed.
Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback at that position.
59
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving position memory
system—
—Memory call system using
memory buttons
To make only slight changes to an already
memorized position, the easiest way is to
first activate the memorized position, then
make the desired changes and perform
step 2 above.
This system can memorize the position
of the driver’s seat and outside rear
view mirrors, and recall them at the
touch of a button.
Buttons “1” and “2” can memorize two
separate positions.
SETTING THE DRIVING POSITION
The ignition switch must be set at ON and
the shift lever is in the “P” position.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside
rear view mirrors to the desired
position.
2. While pushing the “SET” button,
push button “1” or “2” until a beep
is heard.
The system can memorize up to 2 positions by repeating the above steps. If step
2 is performed when both buttons “1” and
“2” are memorized, the previous position
will be erased and a new position will be
set.
60
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Memory call system using
the electronic key
(smart key system only)
To stop the operation, push any driving
position memory button.
To reactivate the system, push the button
“1” or “2” again.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,
the memory will be erased and the memorized positions will have to be set again.
When the driver’s door is opened, you
can recall the memorized position using
the wireless remote control function or
the entry function of the smart key system.
This function can be used after setting the
driving position by following procedure.
CAUTION
Do not start the vehicle while the
adjustments are being made.
Take care not to select the wrong
RECALLING THE MEMORIZED POSITION
When you push button “1” or “2”, a
beep will sound and the driving position will be automatically adjusted to
the position recorded for that button.
The memorized position can be recalled
under the following conditions:
button, or the seat could strike the
rear passenger or hit your body
against the steering wheel. If this
happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another driving
position memory switch, or depressing the brake pedal.
The ignition switch is set at ON and
the shift lever is in the “P” position
with the brake pedal released.
The key is not in the ignition switch
(vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch) or the ignition is turned off (vehicles with smart key system), and
less than 30 seconds have passed
since opening the driver’s door.
61
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you want to set other driving position,
repeat the above procedure. The previous
setting will be erased and the new position will be set.
REGISTERING THE DRIVING POSITION
ONTO THE ELECTRONIC KEY
CANCELING THE DRIVING POSITION ON
TO THE ELECTRONIC KEY
An electronic key can memorize only one
driving position.
The driver’s door must be closed with the
ignition switch turned off.
The driver’s door must be closed with the
ignition switch is turned off.
1. Push and hold the “SET” switch.
2. Push and hold the lock or unlock
button on the electronic key until
two beeps sound.
1. Push and hold the previously memorized driving position button “1” or
“2”.
The memory on the key is disabled. To
enable it again, repeat the above procedure.
2. While depressing the button above−
mentioned, push and hold the lock
or unlock button on the electronic
key until a beep sounds.
62
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear seats
SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER
Lean forward and pull the lever up.
Then lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever.
Flap area
CAUTION
Adjustment should not be made
while the vehicle is moving.
When adjusting the seat, be careful
that the seat does not hit a passenger or luggage.
After adjusting the seatback, push
back your body to make sure it is
locked in position.
When operating the seat, be careful
not to get your hands
pinched in the seat.
or
feet
Do not place objects on the flap
area. Objects placed behind the rear
seat may fall into the gap behind
the seatback. If objects are left in
the gap, the reclining seatback will
not lock properly, leaving the seatback free to move. When the vehicle is in operation, moving seatbacks may cause injury.
In the event that an object gets
caught behind the rear seatback,
contact your Toyota dealer.
63
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Trunk storage extension
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the door behind the armrest closed when not in use.
1. Pull down the armrest in the rear
seat.
2. Push down the handle and open the
door.
If the door is locked, insert the key and
turn it counterclockwise to unlock. Use the
master key (vehicles with the key cylinder−type ignition switch) or mechanical
key (vehicles with the smart key system).
Lock the door after use to protect items
in the trunk.
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 290
in Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.
64
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Head restraints
Armrest
For your safety and comfort, adjust the
head restraint before driving.
To raise: Pull it up.
To lower: Push it down while pressing the
lock release button.
The head restraint is most effective when
it is close to your head. Therefore, using
a cushion on the seatback is not recommended.
CAUTION
Front
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the
top of your ears.
Type A
After adjusting the head restraint,
make sure it is locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Rear
Type B
65
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat ventilators/heaters—
—Seat heater
To use the armrest, pull it down as
shown above.
The front seat heater has two switches:
one marked “L” (for driver’s seat) and
the other marked “R” (for front passenger’s seat).
NOTICE
To turn on the seat heater, push the
knob to pop it out and turn the knob
clockwise.
To prevent damage to the armrest,
avoid putting heavy loads on it.
At this time, the indicator light will illuminate to indicate the seat heater is operating.
The ignition switch must be set at ON to
operate seat heaters.
With seat ventilator
With seat ventilator: Three setting levels
are available.
To disable this function, turn the knob to
the center position. The indicator light
goes off.
Without seat ventilator: To adjust temperature, turn the knob.
To disable this function, turn the knob to
the leftmost position. The indicator light
goes off.
Push the knob into the recessed position
when not in use.
Without seat ventilator
66
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Seat ventilator
CAUTION
Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because it
may make them feel too hot or cause
burns at low temperatures (erythema,
varicella). Use extra caution for;
Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons or persons with
physical disabilities
Persons who have sensitive skin
Persons who are exhausted
Persons who have taken alcohol or
drugs which induce sleep (sleeping
drug, cold remedy, etc.)
To prevent the seat from overheating,
do not use the seat heater with a
blanket, cushion, or other insulating
objects which cover the seat.
NOTICE
Do not put unevenly weighed objects on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
into the seat.
When cleaning the seats, do not
use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.). They may damage the seat
ventilation/heating system and seat
surface.
Before cleaning the seats, fully
wring out the towel that will be
used. Water entering the seats may
cause the seat ventilation/heating
system to malfunction.
The front seat ventilator has two
switches: one marked “L” (for driver’s
seat) and the other marked “R” (for
front passenger’s seat).
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, turn the switches off
when the engine is not running.
To turn on the seat ventilator, push the
knob to pop it out and then turn the
knob counterclockwise.
At this time, the indicator light will illuminate to indicate the seat ventilator is operating.
The ignition switch must be set at ON to
operate seat ventilators.
Three setting levels are available.
To disable this function, turn the knob to
the center position. The indicator light
goes off.
67
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat belts—
—Seat belt precautions
Push the knob into the recessed position
when not in use.
NOTICE
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
into the seat.
When cleaning the seats, do not
use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.). They may damage the seat
ventilation/heating system and seat
surface.
Before cleaning the seats, fully
wring out the towel that will be
used. Water entering the seats may
cause the seat ventilation/heating
system to malfunction.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, turn the switches off
when the engine is not running.
Toyota strongly urges that the driver and
passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase
the chance of injury and/or the severity of
injury in accidents.
The seat belts provided for your vehicle
are designed for people of adult size,
large enough to properly wear them.
Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”
on page 98 in this Section for details.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the
front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the
seat belts should be worn properly. If an
accident occurs and the seat belts are not
worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause death or
serious injury to the child.
68
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not allow any children to stand up or
kneel on either rear or front seats. An
unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or
a collision. Also, do not let the child sit
on your lap. Holding a child in your arms
does not provide sufficient restraint.
Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for
specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips and not on the
waist.
Injured person. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
—Fastening front and rear
seat belts
CAUTION
Persons should ride in their seats
properly wearing their seat belts
whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely
to suffer serious bodily injury or
death in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe
the following:
Use the belt for only one person at
a time. Do not use a single belt for
two or more people—even children.
Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
driver and the front passenger are
sitting up straight and well back in
the seats. If you are reclined, the
lap belt may slide past your hips
and apply restraint forces directly
to the abdomen or your neck may
contact the shoulder belt. In the
event of a frontal collision, the
more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death or serious injury.
Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. Take care that
they do not get caught or pinched
in the seat or doors.
Tab
Inspect the belt system periodically.
Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or
modify the system.
Buckle
Keep the belts clean and dry. If
they need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners, or allow them to come into
contact with the belts—they may
severely weaken the belts. (See
“Cleaning the interior” on page 337
in Section 5.)
Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has been used in a
severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage
is not obvious.
Adjust the seat as needed and sit
straight and well back in the seat.
fasten your belt, pull it out of the
tractor and insert the tab into
buckle.
up
To
rethe
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts
to your size and the seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a
sudden stop or on impact. It also may
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A
slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend, and you can move around freely.
69
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and is then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that
position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint
system securely. (For details, see “Child
restraint” on page 98 in this Section.) To
free the belt again, fully retract the belt
and then pull the belt out once more.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
retractor, firmly pull the belt and release
it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the belt is not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
CAUTION
Take up
slack
loose−fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a
collision or other unintended event.
Keep the lap belt positioned as low
on hips as possible.
Too high
Do not place the shoulder belt un-
Keep as low on
hips as possible
Adjust the position
shoulder belts.
Both high−positioned lap belts and
der your arm.
of
the
Position the lap belt as low as
on your hips—not on your waist,
just it to a snug fit by pulling the
portion upward through the latch
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function
normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from death or serious
injury.
70
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
lap and
possible
then adshoulder
plate.
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in a collision.
Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder
anchor—
To release the belt, press the buckle
release button and allow the belt to
retract.
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
your size.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull
it out and check for kinks or twists. Then
make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
To raise: Slide the anchor up.
To lower: Push in the lock release button
and slide the anchor down.
After adjustment, make sure the anchor is
locked in position.
71
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Seat belt comfort guides
The seat belt comfort guides for the
rear seat outboard positions will provide added seat belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for small adults. When the
outboard shoulder belt is inserted
through the guide, the comfort guide
pulls the belt away from the neck and
head of an occupant.
Seat belt comfort guides are stored in the
both pockets on the sides of the rear
seatback.
INSTALLING THE COMFORT GUIDE
Adjust the seatback to the upright most
position.
1. Pull the
pocket.
To use the comfort guide, do as follows.
72
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
comfort
guide
from
the
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of the
shoulder. The belt should be kept
away from the neck, and should not
fall off the shoulder. Failure to observe these precautions could reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt in
an accident, causing death or serious
injury.
2. Pinch the two edges of the shoulder
belt for the rear seat outboard position with your fingers and slide the
belt past the slot of the guide as
shown above. At this time, the elastic cord must be behind the seat
belt.
3. Buckle, position and release the seat
belt. (For wearing the seat belt, see
“—Fastening front and rear seat
belts” on page 69 in this Section.)
CAUTION
Make sure the belt is not twisted and
that it lies flat. The elastic cord must
be behind the belt and the guide
must be on the front.
73
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Stowing the rear seat belt
buckles
—Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough,
a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of
charge.
Please contact your local Toyota dealer so
that the dealer can order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the
heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length.
Additional ordering information is available
at your Toyota dealer.
REMOVING
AND
COMFORT GUIDE
STORING
THE
The rear seat belt buckles
stowed when not in use.
Pinch the two edges of the seat belt
together so that you can slide them out
of the guide. Store the guide with the
elastic cord into the pocket.
CAUTION
can
be
CAUTION
When using the seat belt extender,
observe the following precautions.
Failure to follow these instructions
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt restraint system in case of
an accident, increasing the chance of
death or serious injury.
Remember that the extender pro-
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, remove and store the
comfort guide in its pocket when it is
not in use.
vided for you may not be safe when
used on a different vehicle, for
another person, or at a different
seating position than the one originally intended.
74
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Make
If the seat belt extender has been
connected to the driver’s seat belt
buckle without wearing the seat belt
when using the extender in the
driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver wears the seat belt even if not
wearing it. In this case, the driver’s
airbag may not activate correctly,
causing death or serious injury in
the event of collision. Be sure to
wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.
sure the “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated when
using the seat belt extender for the
front
passenger
seat.
If
the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, disconnect the extender
tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt.
Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, the front passenger
airbag and side airbag on the front
passenger side may not activate
correctly, causing death or serious
injury in the event of collision.
Do not use the seat belt extender
when installing a child restraint
system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt,
the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in
the event of collision.
Be sure to wear the seat belt without the seat belt extender if you
can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
75
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Seat belt pretensioners
As far as the seat belt extender on the
front passenger side is concerned, do not
fail to disconnect the extender from the
seat belt after the above operation in order to activate the front passenger airbag
correctly when getting into the vehicle
next time.
When not in use, remove the extender
and store in the vehicle for future use.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure
To connect the extender to the seat
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
the buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing
outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.
the tab
that the
the belt
are not
and buckle are locked and
lap and shoulder portion of
and the seat belt extender
twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function
normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from death or serious
injury.
76
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The driver and front passenger seat
belt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in response to a severe frontal impact.
When the sensor detects a severe frontal
impact, the front seat belts are quickly
drawn back by the retractors so that the
belts snugly restrain the occupants.
The seat belt pretensioners are controlled
by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag
sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.
The front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner will not activate if no passenger is
detected in the front passenger seat by
the front passenger occupant classification
system. However, the front passenger’s
seat belt pretensioner may activate if luggage is put on the seat, or the seat belt
is buckled up regardless of the presence
of an occupant in the seat. (As for the
front passenger occupant classification
system, see “—Front passenger occupant
classification system” on page 94 in this
Section.)
The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate together in all collisions.
When the seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may be heard
and a small amount of non−toxic gas may
be released. This does not indicate that
a fire is occurring. This gas is normally
harmless.
Once the seat belt pretensioners have
been activated, the seat belt retractors
remain locked.
The seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the following components,
and their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. SRS warning light
3. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights
4. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
5. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies
6. Front passenger’s
switch
seat
belt
buckle
CAUTION
Do not modify, remove, strike or open
the seat belt pretensioner assemblies,
airbag sensor or surrounding area or
wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent the seat belt pretensioners from activating correctly,
cause sudden operation of the system
or disable the system, which could
result in death or serious injury. Consult your Toyota dealer about any repair and modification.
7. Airbag sensor assembly
77
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIRBAG ON” indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 145 in Section 1−6.)
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
seat belt pretensioners in some
cases.
Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
Repairs on or near the front seat
belt retractor assemblies
Modification of the suspension system
Modification of the front end structure
This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is set at ON. It goes off
after about 6 seconds. This means the
seat belt pretensioners are operating
properly.
Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer
following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.
The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON or remains
on for more than 6 seconds.
The light comes on while driving.
If any seat belt does not retract or
Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure or console
cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant seat
belt pretensioner.
The seat belt pretensioner assembly or
surrounding area has been damaged.
78
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SRS airbags—
—SRS driver airbag, driver
knee airbag and front
passenger airbag
In response to a severe frontal impact,
the SRS front airbags work with the seat
belts to help reduce injury by inflating.
The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s
head, chest or knee caused by hitting the
vehicle interior.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the seat belt pretensioners to operate.
Either seat belt pretensioner assembly
or surrounding area is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver
and front passenger in addition to the
primary safety protection provided by
the seat belts.
The SRS front passenger airbag will not
activate if there is no passenger sitting in
the front passenger seat. However, the
front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt
is buckled up, regardless of the presence
of an occupant in the seat. (As for the
front passenger occupant classification
system, see “—Front passenger occupant
classification system” on page 94 in this
Section.)
Always wear your seat belt properly.
Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor
vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The
airbag system controls airbag deployment
power for the driver and front passenger.
The driver airbag system consists of the
driver seat’s position sensor, etc. The
front passenger’s airbag system consists
of the front passenger occupant classification sensor, etc.
79
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
The SRS front airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the
primary protection of the driver and
front passenger seat belt systems.
The driver and front passenger can
be killed or seriously injured by the
inflating airbags if they do not wear
the available seat belts properly.
During sudden braking just before
a collision, an unrestrained driver
or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or
close proximity to the airbag which
may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection
in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must
wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of
death or serious injury or being
thrown out of the vehicle. For
instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see
“Seat belts” on page 68 in this Section.
Improperly seated and/or restrained
infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploying front airbags. An infant or child
who is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child
restraint
system.
Toyota
strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the
rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seat is the
safest for infants and children. For
instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see
“Child restraint” on page 98 in this
Section.
The SRS front airbags are designed to
deploy in severe (usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration
of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold
level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision
when the vehicle has the impact straight
into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or
sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an
underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,
or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions
where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate
together.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
80
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Collision from the rear
Hitting a curb,
edge of pavement
or hard surface
Falling into or
jumping over
a deep hole
Collision from the side
Vehicle rollover
The SRS front airbags are not generally
designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may
occur.
Landing hard or vehicle falling
The SRS front airbags may also deploy
if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.
The SRS front airbag system consists
mainly of the following components, and
their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights
3. Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
4. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
5. Front passenger’s
switch
seat
belt
buckle
6. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
7. Driver’s seat position sensor
81
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8. Airbag sensor assembly
9. Knee airbag module for driver
(airbag and inflator)
10. Airbag module for driver
(airbag and inflator)
11. SRS warning light
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.
The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.
If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level,
the system triggers the airbag inflators. At
this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with
non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward
motion of the occupants. The front airbags
then quickly deflate, so that there is no
obstruction of the driver’s vision should it
be necessary to continue driving.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
loud noise and release some smoke and
residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.
Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it
may also cause other, less severe injuries
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These
are usually in the nature of minor burns
or abrasions and swelling, but the force of
a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant’s
hands, arms, chest or head is in close
proximity to the airbag module at the time
of deployment. This is why it is important
for the occupant to; avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the
occupant and the airbag module; sit
straight and well back into the seat; wear
the available seat belt properly; and sit as
far as possible from the airbag module,
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
hub, lower portion of driver’s side instrument panel, airbag cover and inflator) may
be hot for several minutes after deployment, so do not touch! The airbags inflate
only once. The windshield may be damaged by absorbing some of the force of
the inflating airbag.
82
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is
too close to the steering wheel, lower
portion of driver’s side instrument
panel or dashboard during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously
injured. Toyota strongly recommends
that:
The driver sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
The front passenger sit as far back
as possible from the dashboard.
All vehicle occupants be properly
restrained using the available seat
belts.
If the seat belt extender has been
connected to the driver’s seat belt
buckle without wearing the seat belt
when using the extender in the
driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver wears the seat belt even if not
wearing it. In this case, the driver’s
airbag may not activate correctly,
causing death or serious injury in
the event of collision. Be sure to
wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.
For instructions and precautions concerning the seating position, see
“—Front seat precautions” on page
56 in this Section.
Do not sit on the edge of the seat
or lean against the dashboard when
the vehicle is in use, since the
front passenger airbag could inflate
with considerable speed and force.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, an airbag when it inflates,
can be killed or seriously injured.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, and always use your seat belt
properly.
83
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the vinyl cover is put on the area
where the SRS knee airbag will
deploy, be sure to remove it.
Do not modify or remove any wir-
Toyota strongly recommends that all
Do not put anything or any part of
infants and children be placed in
the rear seat of the vehicle and be
properly restrained.
your body on or in front of the
dashboard, lower portion of driver’s
side instrument panel or steering
wheel pad that houses the front airbag system. They might restrict
inflation or cause death or serious
injury as they are projected rearward by the force of the deploying
airbags. Likewise, the driver and
front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their
knees.
Do not hold a child on your lap or
in your arms. Use a child restraint
system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of
a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” on page 98 in this Section.
84
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
ing. Do not modify, remove, strike
or open any components, such as
the steering wheel pad, steering
wheel, column cover, dashboard
near the front passenger airbag,
front passenger airbag cover, front
passenger airbag, driver knee airbag or airbag sensor assembly. Doing so may prevent the front airbag
system from activating correctly,
cause sudden activation of the system or disable the system, which
could result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.
If you wish to modify your vehicle for
a person with a physical disability,
consult your Toyota dealer. It may
dangerously interfere with the SRS
front airbags operation.
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS front airbag system in some
cases.
Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
Vehicle with key cylinder−type ignition switch—Do not attach any
heavy, sharp or hard objects such
as keys or accessories to the ignition switch. The objects may restrict the SRS knee airbag inflation
or be thrust into the driver’s seat
area by the force of the deploying
airbag, thus causing a danger.
Modification of the suspension system
Modification of the front end structure
Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
This
tion
after
SRS
ly.
indicator comes on when the igniswitch is set at ON. It goes off
about 6 seconds. This means the
front airbags are operating proper-
Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering
wheel, lower portion of driver’s side
instrument panel or dashboard near
the front passenger airbag
85
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIRBAG ON” indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 145 in Section 1−6.)
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.
following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:
The light does not come on when the
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the
If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer
ignition switch is set at ON or remains
on for more than 6 seconds.
The light comes on while driving.
The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light will come on if there is a
malfunction in the front passenger occupant classification system.
The SRS front airbags have been inflated.
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS front airbags to inflate.
The pad section of the steering wheel,
lower portion of driver’s side instrument
panel or front passenger airbag cover
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
86
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—SRS side airbags and
curtain shield airbags
In response to a severe side impact, the
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags work with the seat belts to help
reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side
airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the
driver’s or front passenger’s chest and the
SRS curtain shield airbags help reduce
injuries mainly to the driver’s, front passenger’s or rear outboard passenger’s
head.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further
protection for the driver, front passenger and rear outboard passengers in
addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.
The SRS side airbag on the passenger
seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in
the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up,
regardless of the presence of an occupant
in the seat. (As for the front passenger
occupant
classification
system,
see
“—Front passenger occupant classification
system” on page 94 in this Section.)
CAUTION
The SRS side airbag and curtain
shield airbag system is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver, front
passenger and rear outboard passenger seat belt systems. To ensure
maximum protection in an accident,
the driver and all passengers in the
vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the
chances of death or serious injury
or being thrown out of the vehicle.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seat belt system,
see “Seat belts” on page 68 in this
Section.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may activate even when the side airbags are not
activated.
Always wear your seat belt properly.
87
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not allow anyone to lean his/her
Improperly seated and/or restrained
head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof
side rail from which the SRS side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
deploy even if he/she is a child
seated in the child restraint system.
It is dangerous if the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact of the deploying airbags could cause death or
serious injury to the occupant.
infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who
is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child
restraint
system.
Toyota
strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the
rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page
98 in this Section.
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system may not activate if the
vehicle is subjected to a collision from
the side at certain angles, or a collision
to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment as
shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags are designed to inflate when the
passenger compartment area suffers a severe impact from the side.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
88
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8. Front passenger’s
switch
seat
belt
buckle
9. Airbag sensor assembly
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system is controlled by the airbag
sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensor.
Collision from the rear
Collision from the front
Vehicle rollover
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags are not generally designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
front or rear collision, if it rolls over,
or if it is involved in a low−speed side
collision.
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system consists mainly of the following components, and their locations are
shown in the illustration.
1. SRS warning light
2. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights
3. Curtain shield airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
4. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
5. Side airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
6. Curtain shield airbag sensors
In a severe side impact, the side and
curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the
curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side airbag inflators and/or the curtain
shield airbag inflators. At this time a
chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help
restrain the lateral motion of the occupants.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
fairly loud noise and release some smoke
and residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.
7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors
89
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor burns or
abrasions and swelling.
Front seats as well as parts of the front
and rear pillars, and roof side rail may be
hot for several minutes, but the airbags
themselves will not be hot. The airbags
are designed to inflate only once.
CAUTION
SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags
inflate with considerable
force. To reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury when they inflate, the driver, front passenger and
rear outboard passengers must:
Wear their seat belts properly.
Remain properly seated with their
backs upright and against the seats
at all times.
Do not allow anyone to lean against
Do not allow anyone to get his/her
the door when the vehicle is in use,
since the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should
be taken especially when you have
a small child in the vehicle.
head close to the area where the
side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, since these airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, distributing your weight evenly
in the seat. Do not apply excessive
weight to the outer side of the
seats with a side airbag and to the
front pillar, rear pillar and roof side
rail with a curtain shield airbag.
90
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not allow anyone to kneel on
Do not allow anyone to get his/her
Do not attach a cup holder or any
the passenger seat, facing the passenger’s side door, since the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.
head or hands out of windows,
since the curtain shield airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.
other device or object on or around
the door. When the side airbag inflates, the cup holder or any other
device or object will be thrown with
great force, or the side airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in
death or serious injury. Likewise,
the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their
arms or on their knees.
91
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not hook a hanger, heavy or
Do not disassemble or repair the
sharp pointed objects on the coat
hook. If the curtain shield airbag
inflates, those items will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury. When you hang clothes,
hang them on the coat hook directly.
front and rear pillars and roof side
rail containing the curtain shield
airbags. Such changes may disable
the system or cause the curtain
shield airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not use seat accessories which
Do not attach a microphone or any
other device or object around the
area where the curtain shield airbag
activates such as on the windshield
glass, side door glass, front and
rear pillars, roof side rail and assist
grips. When the curtain shield airbag inflates, the microphone or other device or object will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.
cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.
Do not modify or replace the seats
or upholstery of the seats with side
airbags. Such changes may prevent
the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system or
cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
92
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.
If you wish to modify your vehicle for
a person with a physical disability,
consult your Toyota dealer. It may
dangerously interfere with the SRS
side airbags and curtain shield airbags operation.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIRBAG ON” indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 145 in Section 1−6.)
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
Modification of the suspension system
Modification of the side structure of
the passenger compartment
Repairs made on or near the console or front seat
This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is set at ON. It goes off
after about 6 seconds. This means the
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are operating properly.
If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer
following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.
The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON or remains
on for more than 6 seconds.
The light comes on while driving.
The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light will come on if there is a
malfunction in the front passenger occupant classification system.
93
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Front passenger occupant
classification system
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:
Any of the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags have been inflated.
The portion of the doors (shaded in the
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
The surface of the seats with the side
airbag (shaded in the illustration) is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
The portion of the front pillars, rear
pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside (shaded in the illustration)
is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with a front
passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions
1—4 in the table on page 96 and based
on these conditions activates or deactivates the following systems;
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger
seat
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
The system monitors the weight and
load on the front passenger seat, and
the seat belt buckle switch to determine
conditions 1—4.
In order for the system to detect the
conditions correctly, do not do any of
the following:
Apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pocket).
Do not use a seat accessory, such as
a cushion or seat cover, that covers
the seat cushion surface.
Put weight on the front passenger seat
by putting your hands or feet on the
seatback from the rear passenger seat.
94
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
A rear passenger lifts the front passenger seat cushion with their legs.
Objects are placed under the front passenger seat.
The front passenger seatback is in
contact with the rear seat.
To ensure the system correctly detects an
adult sitting in the front passenger seat,
make sure the above do not occur.
The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights indicate the actuation of
the front passenger airbag, side airbag
on the front passenger seat and front
passenger’s seat belt pretensioner.
The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light will be
illuminated when the ignition switch is set
at ON with the condition 2 in the table
shown below.
If the front passenger occupant classification system determines that a person of
adult size sits in the front passenger seat
but the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, one of the following is likely
to have occurred:
Make sure that the “AIRBAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated when an adult is
seated in the front passenger seat. If the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight,
well back in the seat, and with the seat
belt worn correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the
rear seat, or if that is not possible, move
the front passenger seat fully rearward.
The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG
OFF” indicator light will come on if
there is a malfunction in the front passenger occupant classification system.
The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights will be illuminated initially when the ignition switch is set at
ON. After about 4 seconds, they will go
off. After that, the front passenger occupant classification system operates
and judges which indicator light be illuminated.
95
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Indicator/warning light
Condition detected
by the front
passenger occupant
classification system
Devices
“AIRBAG ON” and
“AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights
SRS warning
light
Front
passenger’s
seat belt
reminder light
“AIRBAG ON”
Off
Flashing∗4
“AIRBAG OFF”
Off
Flashing∗4
Deactivated
3. Unoccupied
Not illuminated
Off
Off
Deactivated
4. There is a
malfunction in the
system
“AIRBAG OFF”
On
Off
Deactivated
1. Adult∗1
2.
Child∗2
or child
restraint system∗3
Front
passenger
airbag
∗1 :
Side airbag
on the front
passenger
seat
Curtain shield
airbag in the
front
passenger
side
Front
passenger’s
seat belt
pretensioner
Activated
Activated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may
recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
∗2 : When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
∗3 : Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 98 in this Section as for installing the
child restraint system.)
∗4 : In the event that the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
96
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
To avoid potential death or serious
injury when the front passenger occupant classification system does not
detect the conditions correctly, observe the following.
Do not recline the front passenger
seat seatback so that it interferes
with a rear seat as it may cause the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light be illuminated. If the seatback interferes
with the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not interfere with the rear seat.
Keep the front passenger seatback
as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.
Make
sure the “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated when
using the seat belt extender for the
front
passenger
seat.
If
the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, disconnect the extender
tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt.
Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, the front passenger
airbag and side airbag on the front
passenger side may not activate
correctly, which could cause death
or serious injury in the event of
collision.
If
an adult sits in the front
passenger seat, the “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light should be illuminated.
If
the
“AIRBAG
OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, ask
the passenger to sit up straight,
well back in the seat, feet on the
floor, and with the seat belt worn
correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat, or if that is
not
possible,
move
the
front
passenger seat fully rearward.
Wear the seat belt properly.
Make sure the front passenger’s
seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger
seat.
Do not apply a heavy load to the
front passenger seat or equipment
(e.g. seatback pocket).
97
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Child restraint—
—Child restraint precautions
Do not put weight on the front pas-
Do not kick the front passenger
senger seat by putting your hands
or feet on the front passenger seat
seatback from the rear passenger
seat.
seat or subject it to severe impact.
Otherwise, the SRS warning light
may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this
case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
Do not let a rear passenger lift the
front passenger seat with their feet
or press on the seatback with their
legs.
Do not put objects under the front
passenger seat.
Child restraint systems installed on
the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
When it is unavoidable to install the
forward−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat,
install the child restraint system on
the front passenger seat in the
proper order. (As for the installation
order, see “—Child restraint system” on page 100 in this Section.)
The “AIRBAG ON” indicator light may be
illuminated (the front passenger airbag and
side airbag on the front passenger seat
may deploy) even if observing the above
cautions, when a child sits in, or a forward−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger seat. Refer to all the cautions in “SRS airbags” on
page 79 and “Child restraint” described
below.
Do not remove the seat.
98
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Toyota strongly urges the use of appropriate child restraint systems for
children.
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.
and Canada now require the use of a
child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on
page 68 in this Section for details.
CAUTION
For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a
child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint
system depending on the age and
size of the child. Holding a child in
your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed
against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior.
Toyota strongly urges use of a
A forward−facing child restraint sys-
Do not use the seat belt extender
proper child restraint system which
conforms to the size of the child,
installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child
is safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat.
tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIRBAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated,
because the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the
child may be killed or seriously injured.
when installing a child restraint
system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt,
the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in
the event of collision.
Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the
event of an accident, the force of
the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or
serious injury to the child if the
rear−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.
Do not allow the child to lean his/
her head or any part of his/her
body against the door or the area
of the seat, front or rear pillar or
roof side rail from which the side
airbags or curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and/or
curtain shield airbag inflate, and the
impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
Make sure you have complied with
all installation instructions provided
by the child restraint manufacturer
and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly,
it may cause death or serious injury
to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
99
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Child restraint system
A child restraint system for a small
child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must
carefully consult the manufacturer’s
instructions which accompany the child
restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child
restraint system following the manufacturer’s instructions about the appropriate age
and size of the child for the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system correctly
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer. General directions are also
provided under the following instructions.
The child restraint system should be
installed on the rear seat. According to
accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat.
—Types of child restraint
system
Child restraint systems are classified into
the following 3 types depending on the
child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following
the instructions provided by its manufacturer.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of a child restraint
system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” on
page 112 in this Section.
(A) Infant seat
The child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle may also be used.
See “—Installation with child restraint lower anchorages” on page 114 in this Section.
When not using the child restraint system,
keep it secured with the seat belt or place
it in the trunk or somewhere other than
the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
(B) Convertible seat
100
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Installation with seat belt
(C) Booster seat
(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat must be used in rear−
facing position only.
CAUTION
Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the
event of an accident, the impact of
the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag could cause death or
serious injury to the child if the
rear−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.
101
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Same angle
Do not install a child restraint sys-
When installing a child restraint
tem on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupant(s) may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.
system in the rear center position,
adjust both seatbacks to the same
angle. Otherwise, the child restraint
system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death
or serious injuries in a collision.
If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.
102
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the infant seat following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle
taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
the lap portion of the belt tight.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make
sure the belt is in the lock mode before
letting the belt retract.
3. While pressing the infant seat firmly
against the seat cushion and seatback,
let the shoulder belt retract as far as
it will go to hold the infant seat securely.
103
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.
4. To remove the infant seat, press the
buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passenger.
104
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
A convertible seat must be used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depending on the age and size of the
child. When installing, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions about the
appropriate age and size of the child as
well as directions for installing the
child restraint system.
Install the child restraint system on the
front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a
front passenger occupant classification
system. In order to activate the occupant
classification system correctly, install the
forward−facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat in the following
order:
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON.
2. Move the front passenger seat to the
rearward position.
3. Put the child restraint system on the
front passenger seat without putting
your weight on the front passenger
seat.
4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat
belt buckle.
5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended. To hold the seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.
6. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.
Never install a rear−facing child re-
7. Put a child on the child restraint system and secure the child, complying
with the instructions provided by the
child restraint system manufacturer.
The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light should
be illuminated when the ignition switch is
set at ON and the child is in the child
restraint system after following these procedures. The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light
indicates the SRS front passenger airbag
and side airbag on the passenger side will
not deploy. If the “AIRBAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated, remove the child restraint system and reinstall it with the engine off. If the “AIRBAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated when the ignition switch
is set to ON, then the SRS front passenger airbag and side airbag on the passenger side may deploy in an accident. Do
not drive the vehicle in this condition. Remove the child restraint system and contact your Toyota dealer.
straint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger
seat when unavoidable. If you must
install the child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, put the
seat in its most rearward position,
and install the forward−facing child
restraint system in the proper order. Otherwise, the front passenger
occupant classification system can
not detect the presence of the child
restraint system and the front passenger airbag and side airbag on
the front passenger seat could
deploy, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
105
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not allow the child to lean his/
Move seat
fully back
Never install a rear−facing child re-
A forward−facing child restraint sys-
straint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the
event of an accident, the impact of
the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag could cause death or
serious injury to the child if the
rear−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.
tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIRBAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated,
because the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the
child may be killed or seriously injured.
106
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
her head or any part of his/her
body against the door or the area
of the seat, front or rear pillar or
roof side rail from which the side
airbags or curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the
impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
Same angle
Do not install a child restraint sys-
When installing a child restraint
tem on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupant(s) may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.
system in the rear center position,
adjust both seatbacks to the same
angle. Otherwise, the child restraint
system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death
or serious injuries in a collision.
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the convertible seat following
the
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt
tight.
If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.
107
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.
108
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.
4. To remove the convertible seat, press
the buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passenger.
(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION
A booster seat must be used in forward−facing position only.
109
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not allow the child to lean his/
her head or any part of his/her
body against the door or the area
of the seat, front or rear pillar or
roof side rail from which the side
airbags or curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the
impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
Move seat
fully back
Same angle
When installing a child restraint
CAUTION
system in the rear center position,
adjust both seatbacks to the same
angle. Otherwise, the child restraint
system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death
or serious injuries in a collision.
A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIRBAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated,
because the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the
child may be killed or seriously injured.
110
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from child’s neck, but
not falling off child’s shoulder.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.
If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.
Both high−positioned lap belts and
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run
the lap and shoulder belt through or
around the booster seat and across the
child following the instructions provided
by its manufacturer and insert the tab
into the buckle taking care not to twist
the belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly
across the child’s shoulder and that the
lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on
page 68 in this Section for details.
loose−fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a
collision or other unintended event.
Keep the lap belt position as low
on a child’s hips as possible.
For child’s safety, do not place the
shoulder belt under child’s arm.
After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
111
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Using a top strap
Symbol
Anchor brackets
2. To remove the booster seat, press the
buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract.
Follow the procedure below for a child
restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.
Use the anchor bracket on the package
tray behind the rear seat to attach the top
strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each
rear seating position.
This symbol indicates the locations of the
anchor brackets.
112
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:
2. Open the lid of the anchor bracket.
1. Lower the head restraint.
3. Securely fasten the child restraint
system with the seat belt.
Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on
page 98 in this Section.
113
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages
CAUTION
Do not adjust the head restraint or
the seat after securing the child restraint system.
Most leaned
position
Make sure the top strap is securely
latched, and check that the child
restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
Lower anchorages for the child restraint
systems complying with the FMVSS225
or
CMVSS210.2
specifications
are
installed in the rear seat.
CHILD
RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION
The anchorages are installed in the gap
between the seat cushion and seatback of
both outboard rear seats.
Make sure the seatback is locked securely.
Child restraint systems complying with the
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this
case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the
vehicle.
114
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Adjust the seatback
leaned position.
SYSTEM
to
the
most
2. Widen the gap between the seat
cushion and seatback slightly and
confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the buttons on the
seatback.
3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower
straps onto the anchorages and
tighten the lower straps.
Type B—Latch the buckles onto the
anchorages.
For owners in Canada
The symbol on a child restraint system
indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
If your child restraint system has a top
strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” on page 112 in this Section.)
For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.
Canada only
Type A
Canada only
Type B
115
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
When using the lower anchorages
for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.
Push and pull the child restraint
system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.
After securing the child restraint
system, never recline the seat.
Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupant(s) may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.
116
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
1− 4
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Steering wheel and Mirrors
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
119
120
121
122
117
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tilt and telescopic steering
wheel
CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
After adjusting the steering wheel,
try moving it up and down or forward and rearward to make sure it
is locked in position.
TILT STEERING WHEEL
TELESCOPIC STEERING WHEEL
To change the steering wheel angle,
hold the steering wheel, push down the
tilt lock release lever, tilt the steering
wheel to the desired angle and release
the lever.
To change the steering wheel column
length, hold the steering wheel, push
down the telescopic lock release lever,
push or pull the steering wheel to the
desired length and return the lever to
its original position.
When the steering wheel is in a low position, it will spring up as you release the
lock release lever.
118
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Outside rear view mirrors—
Vehicles with the auto anti−glare inside
rear view mirror—
When the inside rear view mirror surface
darkens in automatic mode, the driver’s
side and front passenger’s side (on some
models) outside rear view mirror surface
also darkens to reduce the reflection of
the headlights of the vehicle behind you.
(For details, see “Auto anti−glare inside
rear view mirror” on page 121 in this Section.)
Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the side of your vehicle in the mirror.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside
rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
because it is a convex mirror. Any object
seen in a convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than when seen in a flat
mirror.
NOTICE
The outside rear view mirrors are
fixed in place. Do not try to fold the
mirrors. It may damage the mirrors.
When you push the rear window defogger
switch, the heater panels in the outside
rear view mirrors will quickly clear the
surface. (See “Rear window and outside
rear view mirror defoggers” on page 140
in Section 1−5.)
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur
resulting in death or serious injuries.
On some models, since the mirror
surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the defogger switch is
on.
119
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Power rear view mirror
control
Anti−glare inside rear view
mirror
NOTICE
If ice should jam the mirror, do not
operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de−icer to free
the mirror.
To adjust a mirror, use the switches.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.
1. Master switch—To select the mirror to
be adjusted
Push the switch at “L” (left) or “R”
(right).
To reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving, operate the lever on the lower
edge of the mirror.
2. Control switch—To move the mirror
Push the switch in the desired direction.
Daylight driving—Lever at position 1
The mirrors can be adjusted when the
ignition switch is set at the ACC or ON.
The reflection in the mirror has greater
clarity at this position.
Vehicles with the driving position memory
system—The position of the outside rear
view mirrors and driver’s seat can be
memorized. For details, see “Driving position memory system” on page 60 in Section 1−3.
Night driving—Lever at position 2
Remember that by reducing glare you also
lose some rear view clarity.
120
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Auto anti−glare inside rear
view mirror
In automatic function mode, if the mirror
detects light from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, the mirror surface
darkens slightly to reduce the reflected
light.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.
To turn off the automatic function, press
the “
” switch.
To turn on the automatic function again,
press the “
” switch.
Adjust it before driving so that the rear
view is optimized.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.
This mirror is equipped with auto anti−
glare function. The function is designed
to reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving.
When the ignition switch is set to ON, the
inside rear view mirror always turns on in
the automatic function mode.
When the inside air temperature is low, it
may take a little longer for the mirror to
darken in response to the detection of
headlights.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.
The indicator illuminates to show you that
the function is on.
121
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Sun visors—
CAUTION
Do not slide the sun visor when the
visor is in the position 1. It can cover
the anti−glare inside rear view mirror
and obstruct the rear view.
To ensure correct functioning of anti−
glare mirror sensors located on both
sides of the mirror, do not touch or
cover the sensors with your finger or
a piece of cloth, etc.
To block out glare, move the sun visor.
To block out glare from the front—Swing
down the sun visor (position 1).
To block out glare from the side—Swing
down the sun visor, remove it from the
hook and swing it to the lateral side (position 2).
If glare comes from obliquely behind you,
slide the sun visor backward (to position
3).
122
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Vanity mirrors
To use the vanity mirrors, swing down
the sun visor and open the cover.
The vanity lights come on when you open
the cover.
To adjust the brightness of the lights, slide
the switch.
123
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
124
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
1− 5
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Lights, Wipers and Defogger
Headlights and turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers . . . . . . . . . . .
126
132
133
133
133
134
134
135
136
140
125
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Headlights and turn signals
(for U.S.A.)
Automatic operation—
To turn on or off the lights automatically, twist the headlight/turn signal lever
knob to the “AUTO” position when the
ignition switch is set at ON.
The headlights and/or all of the lights in
position 1 automatically turn on or off depending on the darkness of the surroundings.
Manually twist the knob to the position 2
to turn on the headlights if they are needed immediately when entering a dark tunnel, parking structure, etc.
HEADLIGHTS
The automatic light control sensor is on
the top of the center instrument panel.
Manual operation—
Do not place anything on the instrument
panel, and/or do not affix anything on the
windshield to block this sensor.
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.
Position 1—Parking, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights
Position
above
2—Headlights
and
all
of
If you feel that the automatic light control
comes into operation too early or too late,
have the sensor adjusted by your Toyota
dealer.
the
The headlight indicator lights up in the
instrument cluster.
126
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic light cut off system
Position 1 or “AUTO” position with the
tail lights on—
The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened with the engine
off.
Position 2 or “AUTO” position with the
headlights on—
The lights automatically turn off after 30
seconds when any of the doors or trunk
lid is opened and closed with the engine
off.
The lights can be turned off immediately
by pushing the lock switch on the wireless
remote control transmitter with all the
doors locked and the trunk lid closed.
If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept
open, the lights automatically turn off after
20 minutes.
To turn on the lights again, turn the ignition switch is set at ON or actuate the
headlight switch. If you are going to park
for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off.
NOTICE
To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob
to the position 3 (“DRL OFF”) or turn the
ignition switch off.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.
Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
can make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day. The
DRL system can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be
especially helpful in the short periods after
dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make your headlights
come on at a reduced brightness when:
The engine is running.
The light switch is in the “AUTO” position.
The parking brake is released.
To turn on the other exterior lights and
instrument panel lights, twist the knob to
position 1.
Twist the knob to position 2 to turn the
headlights to full intensity for night driving.
127
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you replace the rear suspension and/or
the vehicle height changes, contact your
Toyota dealer to check the automatic
headlight leveling system and headlight
beam level.
Automatic headlight leveling
(with discharge headlights)
system
High−Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams.
Vehicle position changes according to
loading condition, passengers getting on
and off, vehicle acceleration and deceleration, etc. However, the headlight beam
level is always maintained automatically
by the system at the proper level so that
your headlights do not dazzle other road
users.
The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.
Flashing the high
(position 3)—Pull the
back. The high beam
when you release the
The warning light will come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON and will go off
after a few second.
beam headlights
lever all the way
headlights turn off
lever.
You can flash the high beam headlights
even when the headlight switch is off.
If this system fails, the warning light in
the instrument panel comes on. If this
occurs, have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.
128
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Headlights and turn signals
(for Canada)
Automatic operation—
To turn on or off the lights automatically, twist the headlight/turn signal lever
knob to the position 3 (“AUTO”) when
the ignition switch is set at ON.
The headlights and/or all of the lights in
position 1 automatically turn on or off depending on the darkness of the surroundings.
Manually twist the knob to the position 2
to turn on the headlights if they are needed immediately when entering a dark tunnel, parking structure, etc.
TURN SIGNALS
HEADLIGHTS
To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.
Manual operation—
The ignition switch must be set at ON.
Position 1—Parking, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights
The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.
The tail light indicator lights up in the
instrument cluster.
Position
above
2—Headlights
and
all
of
the
If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light
bulbs” on page 377 in Section 7−3.
129
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Position 2 or position 3 with the headlights on—
The lights automatically turn off after 30
seconds when any of the door or trunk lid
is opened and closed with the engine off.
The lights can be turned off immediately
by pushing the lock switch on the wireless
remote control transmitter with all the
doors locked and the trunk lid closed.
If any of the door or trunk lid is kept
opened, the lights automatically turn off
after 20 minutes.
The automatic light control sensor is on
the top of the center instrument panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument
panel, and/or do not affix anything on the
windshield to block this sensor.
If you feel that the automatic light control
comes into operation too early or too late,
have the sensor adjusted by your Toyota
dealer.
Automatic light cut off system
To turn on the lights again, turn the ignition switch is set at ON or actuate the
headlight switch. If you are going to park
for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.
Position 1 or position 3 with the tail
lights on—
The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened with the engine
off.
130
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
The headlights turn on when the parking
brake is released with the engine started,
even with the light switch in the “OFF”
position. They will not go off until the
ignition switch is turned off.
To turn on the other exterior lights and
instrument panel lights, twist the knob to
position 1.
Twist the knob to the position 2 to turn
the headlights to full intensity for night
driving.
If you replace the rear suspension and/or
the vehicle height changes, contact your
Toyota dealer to check the automatic
headlight leveling system and headlight
beam level.
Automatic headlight leveling
(with discharge headlights)
system
High−Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams.
Vehicle position changes according to
loading condition, passengers getting on
and off, vehicle acceleration and deceleration, etc. However, the headlight beam
level is always maintained automatically
by the system at the proper level so that
your headlights do not dazzle other road
users.
The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.
Flashing the high
(position 3)—Pull the
back. The high beam
when you release the
The warning light will come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON and will go off
after a few second.
beam headlights
lever all the way
headlights turn off
lever.
You can flash the high beam headlights
even when the headlight switch is off.
If this system fails, the warning light in
the instrument panel comes on. If this
occurs, have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.
131
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Emergency flashers
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on
longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
TURN SIGNALS
To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.
The ignition switch must be set at ON.
The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.
If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light
bulbs” on page 377 in Section 7−3.
To turn on the
push the switch.
emergency
flashers,
All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn
them off, push the switch once again.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn
other drivers if your vehicle must be
stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work
when the emergency flashers are operating.
132
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument panel light control
Front fog lights
Interior light
To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the knob.
To turn on the front fog lights, twist
the band of the headlight switch lever
to the fog light mark. They will come
on only when the headlights are on low
beam.
To turn on the interior light, push the
switch.
With the knob turned fully clockwise, the
intensity of the instrument panel lights will
not be reduced even when the tail lights/
headlights are turned on.
The interior light switch has the following
positions:
“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF”—Turns the light off.
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any
door is opened. The light goes off when
all the doors are closed. For details, see
“Illuminated entry system” on page 135 in
this Section.
Interior
light
and
rear
personal
lights—The rear personal lights can be
turned on or off by the interior light
switch.
133
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Front personal lights
Rear personal lights
To turn on the rear personal lights, operate the interior light switch. The
lights can be turned on or off by pushing on each button when the interior
light switch is in the “OFF” or “DOOR”
position.
The interior light switch has the following
positions:
“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF”—Turn the lights on only when pushing on each button.
To turn on the front personal light,
push the switch. To turn the light off,
push the switch once again.
Personal light switch
Interior light switch
134
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any
door is opened or unlock a door with all
the doors are locked. For details, see “Illuminated entry system” on page 135 in
this Section.
Illuminated entry system
135
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Windshield wipers and washer
(intermittent operation type)
The following lights except the center
console illumination and exterior foot
lights will come on when any of the
doors are opened. After all the doors
are closed, the lights remain on for
about 15 seconds before fading out.
The interior light, front and rear personal
light, and the ignition switch light (vehicles
with key cylinder−type ignition switch)
come on when the interior light switch is
in the “DOOR” position.
If all the doors are closed and the ignition
switch is set at ACC, the ignition switch
light and interior light will fade out.
If all the doors are locked, all the lights
will fade out.
When the transmission selector lever is
placed out of the “P” position with the
ignition switch set at ON, the exterior foot
lights will fade out.
4. Center console illumination
To prevent the battery being discharged,
all of the lights will automatically turn off
the key removed (vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition switch) or the ignition is
turned off (vehicles with smart key system), and the door is left opened for
about 20 minutes.
5. Rear personal lights
CENTER CONSOLE ILLUMINATION
6. Exterior foot lights
The center console illumination comes on
when the ignition switch is set at ACC or
ON.
1. Ignition switch light
2. Interior light
3. Front personal lights
When any of the doors are unlocked, the
lights except the center console illumination and exterior foot lights will come on
and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.
If all the doors are closed, when the ignition switch is turned off, the lights except
the center console illumination and exterior foot lights will come on and remain on
for about 15 seconds.
ILLUMINATIONS OF ENTRY FUNCTION
(vehicles with smart key system)
The interior light and exterior foot lights
come on and remain on for about 15 seconds when you carry the registered key
into the entry function actuation area. For
further information of entry function actuation area, see “Smart key system” on
page 27 in Section 1−2.
136
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting.
The ignition switch must be set at ON.
Lever position
Operation
Position 1
Intermittent operation
Position 2
Low speed operation
Position 3
High speed operation
Position 4
Single sweep operation
Position 5
Washer on
Rotating the band on the lever lets you
adjust the wiper time interval when the
wiper lever is in the intermittent position
(position 1). Twist the band upward to
increase the time between sweeps, and
downward to decrease it.
When the lever is set to the intermittent
position (position 1), the wipers move according to the vehicle speed. The higher
the vehicle speed is, the shorter the intermittent time becomes.
When the lever is in the position 2, the
wipers operate at low speed while the
vehicle is moving and, when it stops, they
switch to intermittent operation. If the lever is shifted “LO” position while the vehicle is stopped, the wiper will begin to
work in intermittent operation after a couple of wipes at low speed.
This feature can be deactivated. For details, ask your Toyota dealer.
As soon as the vehicle starts to move,
the wiper will operate once to clear the
driver’s front view if it is set to “INT”.
To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you (position 5).
After the washer operates, the wipers operate three times in low operation, pause
for several seconds, and then operate
once more. This occurs only if the wiper
switch is in the “OFF” or “INT” position.
The interval between the 3 wipes and the
final wipe depends on the vehicle speed.
The final sweep does not occur if the
vehicle speed exceeds 170 km/h (106
mph).
The final wipe (after a pause of several
seconds) prevents the washer fluid from
dripping. The final wipe can be set to
occur after a three second pause, or can
be deactivated. For details, ask your
Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the glass
or may damage wiper blades.
When waxing your vehicle, make sure that
the washer nozzles do not become
blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,
contact your Toyota dealer to have the
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 375 in
Section 7−3.
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.
137
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Windshield wipers and washer
(raindrop detection type)
Even if the wiper lever is in the position
1, the system will switch to intermittent
operations in the following conditions:
Automatic control adjuster
When the windshield gets extremely
cold (at less than −10C [14F])
When the system malfunctions
However, when the windshield gets extremely hot (at more than 90C [194F]),
the wipers do not operate even if the
wiper lever is in the position 1.
To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting.
The ignition switch must be set at ON.
Lever position
Operation
Position 1
Automatic operation
Position 2
Low speed operation
Position 3
High speed operation
Position 4
Single sweep operation
Position 5
Washer on
Automatic operation (position 1)
The wiper speed is determined by the
amount of raindrops and sunlight detected
by the automatic wiper control sensor.
The automatic wiper control sensor is on
the inside of the windshield as shown
above.
If you feel that the operation of the automatic wiper control is too fast or too slow,
twist the automatic control adjuster in the
“−” direction to lower sensitivity, and “+”
direction to boost the sensitivity.
138
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
As soon as the vehicle starts to move,
the wiper will operate once to clear the
driver’s front view if it is set to “AUTO”.
CAUTION
Be careful not to get your fingers
caught between the wipers and windshield.
When the wiper lever is in the position 1 with the ignition switch on, the
wipers could operate automatically in
the following cases:
If you touch the upper center of the
windshield adjacent to the sensor.
If you wipe the upper center of the
windshield (adjacent to which the
sensor is located) with a towel or
other object.
If the windshield vibrates.
If you touch the sensor.
NOTICE
Do not apply detergent to or wet the
automatic wiper control sensor when
cleaning the inside of the windshield.
To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you (position 5).
After the washer operates, the wipers operate three times in low operation, pause
for several seconds, and then operate
once more. This occurs only if the wiper
switch is in the “OFF” or “AUTO” position.
The interval between the 3 wipes and the
final wipe depends on the vehicle speed.
The final sweep does not occur if the
vehicle speed exceeds 170 km/h (106
mph).
The final wipe (after a pause of several
seconds) prevents the washer fluid from
dripping. The final wipe can be set to
occur after a three second pause, or can
be deactivated. For details, ask your
Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the glass
or may damage wiper blades.
When waxing your vehicle, make sure that
the washer nozzles do not become
blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,
contact your Toyota dealer to have the
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 375 in
Section 7−3.
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.
139
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers
To defog or defrost the rear window,
push the switch.
The ignition switch must be set at ON.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the
rear window will quickly clear the surface.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate
the defogger is operating.
Type B only—The heater panels in the
outside rear view mirrors will also quickly
clear the surfaces. Keep your hands off
the mirror faces when the switch is on.
Type A
Push the switch once again to turn the
defoggers off.
The system will automatically shut off after the defogger has operated about 15
minutes.
CAUTION
Type B only—Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them
when the defogger switch is on.
Type B
140
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Make sure you turn the defoggers off
when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the
defoggers on for a long time could cause
the battery to discharge, especially during
stop−and−go driving. The defoggers are
not designed for drying rain water or for
melting snow.
Type B only—If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a
spray de−icer before operating the switch.
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connectors.
SECTION
1− 6
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and two trip meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
142
143
143
145
141
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Engine coolant temperature
gauge
Fuel gauge
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill
the fuel tank immediately.
Low fuel level
warning light
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
The gauge indicates the approximate
quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
when the ignition switch is set at ON.
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature when the ignition switch is
on. The engine operating temperature
will vary with changes in weather and
engine load.
Nearly full—Needle at “F”
Nearly empty—Needle at “E”
If the needle moves into the red zone,
your engine is too hot. If your vehicle
overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the
engine to cool.
It is a good idea to keep the tank over
1/4 full.
If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low
fuel level warning light comes on, fill the
fuel tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge
needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.
142
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tachometer
Odometer and two trip meters
The tachometer indicates engine speed
in thousands of rpm (revolutions per
minute). Use it while driving to select
correct shift points and to prevent engine lugging and over−revving.
This meter displays the odometer and
two trip meters when the ignition
switch is set at ON.
Driving with the engine running too fast
causes excessive engine wear and poor
fuel economy. Remember, in most cases
the slower the engine speed, the greater
the fuel economy.
2. Two trip meters—Show two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.
Your vehicle may overheat during severe
operating conditions, such as:
Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
Reducing speed or stopping after high
speed driving.
Idling for a long period with the air
conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.
Towing a trailer.
NOTICE
Do not remove the thermostat in
the engine cooling system as this
may cause the engine to overheat.
The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant to keep the
temperature of the engine within
the specified operating range.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 319 in
Section 4.
NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get
into the red zone. This may cause
severe engine damage.
1. Odometer—Shows the total
the vehicle has been driven.
distance
You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected.
143
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two
trip meters to zero, and also change
the meter display.
To change the meter display, quickly
push and release the button. The meter
display changes in the order from the
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter
B, then back to the odometer each
time you push.
To reset the trip meter A to zero, display the meter A reading, then push
and hold the button until the meter is
set to zero. The same process can be
applied for resetting the trip meter B.
144
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
If the indicator or buzzer comes on...
(a)
or
Do this.
If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.
(indicator and buzzer)
(b)
Fasten driver’s seat belt.
(indicator and buzzer)
(c)
Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.
(indicator and buzzer)
(d)
Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.
(e)
Stop and check.
(f)
or
(g)
Low fuel level warning light
Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.
Fill up tank.
145
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the indicator or buzzer comes on...
(h)
or
(i)
Do this.
Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.
If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.
Close all doors.
(indicator and buzzer)
(j)
Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.
(k)
Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.
(l)
Adjust tire inflation pressure (including spare tire). If the light blinks,
contact Toyota dealer.
(m)
Add washer fluid.
(n)
Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.
146
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the indicator or buzzer comes on...
(o)
Do this.
Replace engine oil.
(p)
Shift selector lever to “P” and turn off engine. Check key.
(indicator and buzzer)
(q)
Dynamic laser cruise control
master warning light
Check condition according to warning code. If system malfunctions, contact Toyota
dealer.
(r)
Key reminder buzzer
Remove key.
147
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(a) Brake System Warning Light and
Buzzer
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.
(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light
and Buzzer
This light comes on in the following cases
when the ignition switch is set at ON.
CAUTION
The light and buzzer act as a reminder to
buckle up the driver’s seat belt.
When the parking brake is applied...
This light comes on for a few seconds
when the ignition switch is set at ON even
after the parking brake is released.
If the vehicle speed rises above 5 km/h
(3 mph) with the parking brake applied for
1 seconds or more, a buzzer sounds.
When the brake fluid level is low...
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving
normally when the brake fluid level is
low.
Have your vehicle checked at your
Toyota dealer in the following cases:
The light does not come on even if the
parking brake is applied when the ignition switch is set at ON.
If either of the following conditions
occurs, immediately stop your vehicle
at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
The light does not turn off even
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running.
In this case, the brakes may not
work properly and your stopping
distance will become longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and
bring the vehicle to an immediate
stop.
The brake system warning light remains on together with the “ABS”
warning light.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
The light does not come on even if the
ignition switch is set at ON with the
parking brake released.
148
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Once the ignition switch is set at ON or
engine start, the reminder light flashes
and buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt
is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens
the belt, the light continues flashing and
the buzzer sounds for about 6 seconds.
If the vehicle speed rises above 15 km/h
(9 mph) with the seat belt unfastened, the
buzzer will sound for about 10 seconds.
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,
the buzzer will sound in a different tone
for 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle speed
drops below 15 km/h (9 mph), the buzzer
will continue to sound. To stop the buzzer,
fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer still
sounds, make sure the front passenger’s
seat belt is fastened.
(c) Front Passenger’s Seat
minder Light and Buzzer
Belt
Re-
The light and buzzer act as a reminder to
have the front passenger buckle up the
seat belt.
Once the ignition switch is set at ON or
engine start, the reminder light flashes if
a passenger sits in the front passenger
seat and does not fasten the seat belt.
Unless the front passenger fastens the
belt, the light continue flashing.
If the vehicle speed rises above 15 km/h
(9 mph) with the seat belt unfastened, the
buzzer will sound for about 10 seconds.
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,
the buzzer will sound in a different tone
for 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle speed
drops below 15 km/h (9 mph), the buzzer
will continue to sound. To stop the buzzer,
fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer still
sounds, make sure the driver’s seat belt
is fastened.
(d) Charging System Warning Light
This warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is set at ON, and goes off
when the engine is started.
When there are problems in the charging
system while the engine is running, the
warning light comes on.
NOTICE
When the charging system warning
light comes on while the engine is
running, malfunctions such as the engine drive belt being broken may have
occurred. If the warning light comes
on, immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota
dealer.
(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
Light
This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.
If it flickers or stays on while you are
driving, pull off the road to a safe place
and stop the engine immediately. Call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.
The light may occasionally flicker when
the engine is idling or it may come on
briefly after a hard stop. There is no
cause for concern if it then goes out when
the engine is accelerated slightly.
The light may come on when the oil level
is extremely low. It is not designed to
indicate low oil level, and the oil level
must be checked using the level dipstick.
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the
warning light on—even for one block.
It may ruin the engine.
If luggage or other load is placed on the
front passenger seat, depending on its
weight, the reminder light to flash and
buzzer to sound.
149
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This lamp comes on when the ignition
switch is set at ON and goes off after
the engine starts. This means that the
warning light system is operating properly.
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp
comes on while driving, first check the
followings.
Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.
Loose fuel tank cap
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely
tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after
several trips, contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel
tank cap is not loose...
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) programs
There is a problem somewhere in the
Your vehicle may not pass a state
emission inspection if the malfunction
indicator lamp remains on. Contact your
Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s
emission
control
system
and
OBD
(On−Board Diagnostics) system before
taking your vehicle for the inspection.
engine, emission control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic
transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.
Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
If engine speed does not increase when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there
may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.
For details, see “Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 346
in Section 6.
At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
This light comes on when the fuel level
in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up
the tank as soon as possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
the engine off.
CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.
150
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.
(h) “ABS” Warning Light
Vehicles without vehicle stability control
system—
The light comes on with the ignition
switch is set at ON. If the anti−lock brake
system works properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the
system malfunctions, the light comes on
again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate,
but the brake system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON or remains
on.
The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
Vehicles with vehicle stability control
system—
The light comes on when the ignition
switch is set at ON. If the anti−lock brake
system and the brake assist system work
properly, the light turns off after a few
seconds. Thereafter, if the system malfunctions, the light comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system and the brake assist system do not operate, but the brake
system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
151
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON or remains
on.
The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
(i) Open Door Warning Light and Buzzer
This light remains on until all the doors
are completely closed.
The buzzer also sounds once when any
of the doors is not completely closed at
the vehicle speed 5 km/h (3 mph) or
more. Stop the vehicle and close the door
completely.
(j) SRS Warning Light
This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is set at ON. It goes off
after about 6 seconds. This means the
SRS airbags and seat belt pretensioners
are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIRBAG ON” indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power
sources.
152
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer
following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.
The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON or remains
on for more than 6 seconds.
The light comes on while driving.
The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light will come on if there is a
malfunction in the front passenger occupant classification system.
(k) “VSC” Warning Light
The light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the vehicle stability control
system or traction control system.
The light will come on when the ignition
switch is set at ON and will go off after
about a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the
vehicle stability control system and traction control system do not work. However,
as conventional braking operates when applied, there is no problem to continue your
driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
The light does not come on after the
ignition is turned to on.
The light is left on after the ignition is
turned to on.
The light comes on while driving.
(l) Tire Pressure Warning Light
This light warns that the tire inflation pressure of one or more of your tires is low.
The light comes on when the ignition
switch is set at ON. It goes off after a
few seconds. This indicates that the tire
pressure warning system is functioning
properly.
If the warning light comes on, stop your
vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and check that the inflation pressure
of all tires is as specified on the tire and
loading information label. (See “Checking
tire inflation pressure“ on page 361 in
Section 7−2.) The light should go off a
few minutes after the tire pressure is adjusted.
(n) Automatic Headlight Leveling System Warning Light
If the warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute, the tire pressure warning
system may be malfunctioning. Contact
your Toyota dealer.
If it comes on, have your vehicle checked
by your Toyota dealer.
For details, see “Tire pressure warning
system” on page 169 in Section 1−7.
This light acts as a reminder to replace
the engine oil.
(m) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level
Warning Light
This light will come on when the ignition
switch is set at ON and will go off after
about a few seconds.
The light warns that the windshield washer
fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at
your earliest opportunity. (For instructions,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 375 in
Section 7−3.)
The light will come on when the ignition
switch is set at ON and will go off after
about a few seconds.
This light warns that when there is a
problem somewhere in the automatic
headlight leveling system.
The light will come on when the ignition
switch is set at ON and will go off after
a few seconds.
(o) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder
Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
When you drive for about 7200 km (4500
miles) after the engine oil replacement,
this light illuminates for about 3 seconds
and then flashes for about 15 seconds
with the ignition switch is set at ON. If
you continue driving without replacing the
engine oil, and if the distance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000 miles), the light will
come on after the ignition switch is set at
ON. The light will remain on thereafter.
153
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the light is flashing, we recommend that
you replace the engine oil at an early
opportunity depending on the driving and
road conditions. If the light comes on,
replace it as soon as possible.
(q) Dynamic Laser Cruise Control Master Warning Light
The system must be reset after the engine oil replacement. Reset the system by
the following procedure:
The light will come on when the ignition
switch is set at ON and go off after a few
seconds.
1. Turn the engine off with the odometer
reading shown. (For details, see
“Odometer and two trip meters” on
page 143 in this Section.)
When the light comes on, the alarm
sounds and the warning code will appear
on the display. At this time, dynamic laser
cruise control is cancelled. For details,
see “Dynamic laser cruise control” on
page 179 in Section 1−7.
2. Turn the ignition switch is set at ON
while holding down the trip meter reset
knob.
Hold down the knob for at least 5 seconds. The odometer indicates “000000”
and the light goes off.
If the system fails to reset, the light will
continue flashing.
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the dynamic laser cruise
control system.
(r) Key Reminder Buzzer (vehicles with
key cylinder−type ignition switch)
This buzzer act as a reminder to remove
the key when you open the driver’s door
with the engine off.
(p) Smart Key System Warning Light
and Buzzer
The light and buzzer warn that there is a
problem somewhere in the operation of
the smart key system. See “Driving and
parking using smart key system” on page
300 in Section 3.
154
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CHECKING
SERVICE
REMINDER
INDICATORS (except the low fuel level
warning light)
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open one of the doors.
The open door warning light should
come on.
3. Close the door.
The open door warning light should go
off.
4. Set the ignition switch at ON, but do
not start the engine.
All the service reminder indicators except the open door warning light should
come on. The “ABS” and “VSC” warning lights, tire pressure warning light,
low windshield washer fluid level warning light, automatic headlight leveling
system warning light, engine oil replacement reminder light and dynamic
laser cruise master warning light go off
after a few seconds. The SRS warning
light goes off after about 6 seconds.
(slip indicator light and “READY” [dynamic laser cruise ready mode] indicator light also come on and go off after
a few seconds. Front passenger occupant classification indicator lights also
come on and go off after about 4 seconds.)
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described
above, have it checked by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
155
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
156
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
1− 7
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic laser cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
161
165
167
169
175
176
179
157
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Ignition switch
(with key cylinder−type
ignition switch)
“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering
wheel is locked. The key can be removed only at this position.
The selector lever must be put in the “P”
position before turning the key from “ACC”
to the “LOCK” position.
Once you remove the key, the engine immobilizer system is automatically set. (See
“Engine immobilizer system” on page 16
in Section 1−2.)
“START”—Starter motor on. The key
will return to the “ON” position when
released.
For starting tips, see page 295 in Section
3.
“ON”—Engine on and all accessories
on.
This is the normal driving position.
“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio
operate, but the engine is off.
If you leave the key at the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position and open the driver’s
door, a buzzer will remind you to remove
the key.
When starting the engine, the key may
seem stuck at the “LOCK” position. To
free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
the way in, and then rock the steering
wheel slightly while turning the key gently.
Approximately five hours after the engine
is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from underneath the luggage compartment
for several minutes. This is normal operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
(See “Leak detection pump” on page viii.)
It is not a malfunction if the needle on all
meters and gauges move slightly when the
key is turned to the “ACC”, “ON” or
“START” position.
158
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTICE
Do not leave the key at the “ON” if
the engine is not running. The battery
will discharge and the ignition could
be damaged.
Ignition switch
(with smart key system)
Third time—Power off (indicator light
off)
Pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch again returns the ignition switch to
the ACC.
When the key is in the vehicle, pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
(engine switch) allows you to start and
stop the engine or choose at the ACC,
ON, or ignition switch off.
If a buzzer sounds and the smart key
system warning light comes on for 5 seconds when pressing the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch, this indicates that the key
is not in the vehicle.
When the brake pedal is not depressed,
pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch changes the ignition switch mode
as follows. Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch slowly and firmly.
First time—ACC (accessory) mode (illuminate amber)
Accessories such as the radio operate.
Second time—ON mode (illuminate amber)
Power on and all accessories on.
159
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the brake pedal is depressed, the indicator light will turn green, regardless
of which mode is selected. When the
indicator light is green, pressing the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch once
starts the engine. (For starting tips, see
“How to start the engine” on page 296
in Section 3.)
When the battery is disconnected or
run down, the push button start function
memorizes the current mode. After you
reconnect, replace, or recharge the battery, the memorized mode is selected automatically. In any of these cases, turn off
the engine if the engine comes on.
If the amber indicator light on the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch blinks, this
indicates a malfunction of the push start
system. Turn off the engine immediately
and contact your Toyota dealer.
Approximately five hours after the engine
is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from underneath the luggage compartment
for several minutes. This is normal operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
(See “Leak detection pump” on page viii.)
It is not a malfunction if the needle on all
meters and gauges move slightly when the
ignition switch is set at ACC, ON or when
the engine starts.
NOTICE
Do not leave the ignition switch at
ON if the engine is not running. The
battery will discharge and the ignition
could be damaged.
160
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic transmission
Selector lever
Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition
switch is set at ON).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and
key removal
R: Reverse
“D” position
Sequential
position
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving (shifting into overdrive)
Sequential position: “S” mode driving
Shift with the brake pedal
depressed.
(The ignition switch must be
set at ON.)
+: Upshift range
−: Downshift range
Shift normally.
To select sequential position or
“D”, lean the selector lever
leftward or rightward.
161
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(b) Normal driving
(c) Driving in “S” mode
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 296 in
Section 3. The transmission must be in
“P” or “N”.
To select the “S” mode, put the selector lever in the sequential position.
2. With your foot holding down the brake
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.
When the lever is in the “D” position, the
automatic transmission system will select
the most suitable gear for running conditions such as normal cruising, hill climbing, hard towing, etc.
Always use the “D” position for better fuel
economy and quieter driving. In this position, shifting into the overdrive gear is
possible. If the engine coolant temperature
is low, the transmission will not shift into
the overdrive gear even in the “D” position.
In the “S” mode, you can change the
shift range position. The shift range
position can be switched between 5
(fifth range) and 1 (first range) by
pushing the selector lever forward towards “+” or pulling back towards “−”.
When the selector lever is moved into
the “S” mode, the initial shift range
position is 4 (fourth range).
The “S” mode indicator light and the current shift range position are shown on the
instrument cluster.
CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.
1: Upshift range
2: Downshift range
162
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Shift range positions
“5” (Fifth range):
The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and overdrive
(fifth) gears according to the vehicle
speed or driving conditions.
“4” (Fourth range):
The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and fourth
gears according to the vehicle speed
or driving conditions. Slight engine
braking will be obtained on a downhill
road. Smooth running with less shifting
will be obtained on an uphill road.
“3” (Third range):
The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and third
gears according to the vehicle speed
or driving conditions. This range is to
be used when stronger engine braking
is necessary.
“2” (Second range):
First or second gear will be selected
automatically according to the vehicle
speed or driving conditions. This range
is to be used when engine braking
stronger than that of the “3” range
position is necessary.
“1” (First range):
The gear is fixed in first regardless of
vehicle speed or driving conditions.
This range is to be used when maximum engine braking is necessary.
If you attempt to downshift the transmission when it is not possible to downshift
due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone
sounds twice.
Maximum allowable speeds
To get on a highway or to pass slower
traffic, maximum acceleration may be necessary. Make sure you observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each
range:
range
1
2
3
km/h
59
106
165
(mph)
(37)
(66)
(103)
NOTICE
Do not downshift if you are going
faster than the maximum allowable
speed for the next lower range.
When the “S” mode indicator light does
not come on even with the selector lever
moved to the sequential position, there
may be a problem somewhere in the
system. Have your vehicle checked/repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. In this case, you can drive in
the same condition as in the “D” position.
(d) Using engine braking
To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:
When driving in the “D” position—
Shift the selector lever to sequential
position.
When driving in the “5” range within
the sequential position—
Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “4” range.
The transmission will downshift to
fourth range and engine braking will be
enabled.
Vehicles with cruise control or dynamic
laser cruise control—When the cruise
control is being used, engine braking
can not be enabled because the cruise
control is not cancelled.
163
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see “Cruise control” on page 176 or “Dynamic laser cruise control” on page 179
in this Section.
Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “3” range. The
transmission will downshift to third
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than 147 km/h (91
mph), and stronger engine braking will
be enabled.
Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “2” range. The
transmission will downshift to second
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than 91 km/h (56
mph), and more powerful engine braking than that of the “3” range position
will be enabled.
CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery
surface.
Abrupt
shifting
could cause the vehicle to skid or
spin.
(e) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.
NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “1” range. The
transmission will downshift to first
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than 39 km/h (24
mph), and maximum engine braking will
be enabled.
164
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(f) Parking
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal pressed down,
fully depress the parking brake pedal
to apply the parking brake securely.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
CAUTION
Never attempt to move the selector
lever into “P” position under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.
Traction control system
(g) Good driving practice
If the transmission repeatedly shifts up
and down between third gear and overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever into sequential
position.
When towing a trailer, in order to maintain engine braking efficiency, do not
use overdrive.
(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever out of “P” position
If you cannot shift the selector lever from
the “P” position even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
override button. For instructions, see “If
you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 331 in Section 4.
The traction control system automatically helps prevent the spinning of front
wheels when the vehicle is started or
accelerated on slippery road surfaces.
When the ignition switch is set at ON, the
system automatically turns on.
CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and
power against front wheels cannot be
maintained, even though the traction
control system is in operation. Do not
drive the vehicle under any speed or
maneuvering conditions which may
cause the vehicle to lose traction
control. In situations where the road
surface is covered with ice or snow,
your vehicle should be fitted with
snow tires or tire chains. Always
drive at an appropriate and cautious
speed for the present road conditions.
CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.
NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.
165
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When the traction control system is operating, the following conditions occur:
The system controls the spinning of the
front wheels. At this time, the slip indicator light blinks.
You may feel vibration or noise in your
vehicle, caused by operation of the
brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.
NORMAL DRIVING MODE
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is set at
ON. If the indicator light does not come
on when the ignition is turned on, contact
your Toyota dealer.
“VSC” warning light
Leave the system on during the ordinary driving so that it can operate
when needed.
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the traction control system
or the vehicle stability control system.
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the traction control system is in the self−check
mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.
The light will come on when the ignition
switch is set at ON and will go off after
a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the
system does not work. However, as conventional braking operates when applied,
there is no problem to continue your driving.
166
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle stability control
system
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
The warning light does not come on
after the ignition switch is set at ON.
The warning light remains on after the
ignition switch is set at ON.
The warning light comes on while driving.
The vehicle stability control system
helps provide integrated control of the
systems such as anti−lock brake system, traction control, engine control,
etc. This system automatically controls
the brakes and engine to help prevent
the vehicle from skidding when cornering on a slippery road surface or operating steering wheel abruptly.
This system will activate when your vehicle speed reaches or exceeds 15 km/h
(9 mph), and will deactivate when the vehicle speed reduces to below 15 km/h (9
mph).
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the system is in the self−check mode but does
not indicate a malfunction.
CAUTION
Do not rely excessively on the vehicle stability control system. Even
if the vehicle stability control system is operating, you must always
drive carefully and attentively to
avoid serious injury. Reckless driving will result in an unexpected accident. If the slip indicator light
flashes and an alarm sounds, special care should be taken while
driving.
Only use tires of specified size. The
size, manufacture, brand and tread
pattern for all 4 tires should be the
same. If you use the tires other
than specified, different type or
size, the vehicle stability control
system may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels,
contact your Toyota dealer. (See
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 363 in Section 7−2.)
In situations where the road surface
is covered with ice or snow, your
vehicle should be fitted with snow
tires or tire chains.
167
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
The warning light does not come on
after the ignition switch is set at ON.
The warning light remains on after the
ignition switch is set at ON.
The warning light comes on while driving.
If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light blinks and an
alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.
“VSC” warning light
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is set at
ON. If the indicator light does not come
on when the ignition is turned on, contact
your Toyota dealer.
The light will come on when the ignition
switch is set at ON and will go off after
a few seconds.
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the vehicle stability control
system or the traction control system.
If the light comes on while driving, the
system does not work. However, as conventional braking operates when applied,
there is no problem to continue your driving.
168
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire pressure warning system
The tire pressure warning system warns
you that the tire inflation pressure is
low.
The tire pressure warning system is not
a substitute for checking normal tire inflation pressure. Check the tire inflation
pressure with a tire pressure gauge regularly.
Indicator
status
AI17008
CAUTION
The warning system may not activate
immediately if the tire bursts or sudden air leakage should occur.
Meanings
Do this
ON
Tire inflation
pressure is
low
Adjust the
tire inflation
pressure
ON after
blinking for
1 minute
Tire pressure warning system
malfunction
Have the
system
checked at
your Toyota
dealer
The tire pressure warning light comes on
when the ignition switch is set at ON and
goes off after a few seconds. This means
the tire pressure warning light is operating
properly. If the tire inflation pressure becomes low, the light comes on again. In
this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the light after a few
minutes. If the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute, the tire pressure warning
system is not working properly.
169
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
If the tire pressure warning light
comes on, be sure to observe the
following precautions. Failure to do
so could cause loss of vehicle control
and result in death or serious injury.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place as
soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light
comes on even after tire inflation
pressure adjustment, it is probable
that you have a flat tire. Check the
tires. If the tire is flat, change to
the spare tire and have the flat tire
repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.
Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
The tire pressure warning light may turn
on due to natural causes such as natural
air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes
caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn
off the light after a few minutes.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset
switch should not turn off the tire pressure
warning light. Adjusting the tire inflation
pressure will turn off the light.
The spare tire (except compact spare tire)
is also equipped with the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter. The tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the
tire inflation pressure of the spare tire is
low. If a tire goes flat, even though the
flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the
warning light does not turn off. Replace
the spare tire with the repaired tire and
adjust the proper tire inflation pressure.
The tire pressure warning light will turn off
after a few minutes.
The compact spare tire is not equipped
with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the warning
light will not turn off even though the flat
tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire
and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will
turn off after a few minutes.
170
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label (tire
and load information label). (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label
(tire and load information label), you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS–
tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
(tire pressure warning light) when one
or more of your tires is significantly
under−inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under−inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under−inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
NOTICE
Do not use liquid sealants for a flat
tire as tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter will be damaged.
When the tires must be repaired or
replaced, have them repaired or replaced by the nearest Toyota dealer
or an authorized tire dealer. The
tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters will be affected by the
installation or removal of tires.
AI17009
IF THE TIRE PRESSURE WARNING
LIGHT COMES ON AFTER BLINKING
FOR 1 MINUTE...
If the tire pressure warning light comes
on after blinking for 1 minute when the
ignition switch is set at ON, the tire
pressure warning system is not working
properly.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under−inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).
The system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the
system will work properly.)
If tires not equipped with tire pressure
warning
used.
valves and
transmitters are
171
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the ID code on the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters is not
registered.
If electronic devices or facilities using
similar radio
nearby.
wave
frequencies
are
If a radio set at similar frequencies is
Even if you use genuine wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work
properly with some types of tires.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset
switch should not turn off the tire pressure
warning light.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
in use in the vehicle.
If a window tint that affects the radio
wave signals is installed.
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the
vehicle, in particular around the wheels
or wheel housings.
If non−genuine Toyota wheels are used.
If tire chains are used.
If the spare tire (except compact spare
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
tire) is in a location subject to poor
radio wave signal reception.
If the tire inflation pressure is more
than 500 kPa (5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar, 73
psi).
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
—Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute frequently when
the ignition switch is set at ON, have the
system checked by your Toyota dealer.
—Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
172
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
—Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
REPLACING TIRES AND WHEELS
When replacing the tires and wheels, be
sure to install tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters. ID codes on the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters
are registered on the tire pressure warning
ECU. When replacing a tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have
the ID code registered by your Toyota
dealer.
If the ID code is not registered, the system will not work properly. After about 1
hour, the tire pressure warning light
comes on after blinking for 1 minute to
indicate a system malfunction.
NOTICE
When the tires or tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be
replaced, have them replaced by your
Toyota dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be
affected by the installation or removal
of tires.
TIRE PRESSURE
SWITCH
WARNING
RESET
When initializing the system, the present
tire inflation pressure is stored as standard. The tire pressure warning system
determines decreased air pressure by
comparing the present and the standard
tire inflation pressures. When you change
the set tire inflation pressure, it is necessary to initialize the tire pressure warning
system.
173
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation
pressures.
When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or
load weight, etc.
When changing the tire size.
To initialize the system, perform the following:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place and
turn the ignition switch off.
2. Adjust the pressure of all the installed
tires to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (See “Tires” on page
386 in Section 8.)
AI17009
3. Set the ignition switch to ON.
4. Push and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure
warning light blinks slowly three times.
5. Wait for a few minutes with the ignition
switch ON, and then turn the ignition
switch off.
If you push the tire pressure reset switch
while the vehicle is moving, initialization is
not performed.
If you push the tire pressure reset switch
accidentally and initialization is performed,
adjust the tire inflation pressure to the
specified level and initialize the system
again.
174
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the tire pressure warning light does not
blink slowly three times when you push
and hold the reset switch, initialization has
failed and the tire pressure warning system may not work properly. In this case,
initialize the system again. If initialization
cannot be performed, have the system
checked at your Toyota dealer.
Parking brake
When parking, firmly apply the parking
brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.
CAUTION
To set: Fully depress the parking brake
pedal. For better holding power, first depress the brake pedal and hold it while
setting the parking brake.
To release: Depress the parking brake
pedal while depressing the brake pedal.
Do not push the reset switch without
first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise,
the tire pressure warning light may
not come on even if the tire inflation
pressure is low, or it may come on
when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
To remind you that the parking brake is
set, the parking brake reminder light in
the instrument panel remains on until you
release the parking brake.
Type A
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the parking brake reminder light is off.
Type B
175
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cruise control
The cruise control allows you to cruise
the vehicle at a desired speed over 40
km/h (25 mph) with your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Your cruising speed can be maintained
although a slight speed change may occur
when driving up or down gradient, within
the limits of engine performance. On
steeper hills, a greater speed change will
occur so it is better to drive without the
cruise control.
Avoid vehicle speed increases when
driving downhill. If the vehicle
speed is too fast in relation to the
cruise control set speed, cancel the
cruise control then downshift the
transmission to use engine braking
to slow down.
CAUTION
To help maintain maximum control
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON
To operate the cruise control, press the
“ON−OFF” button. This turns the system
on. The indicator light in the instrument
cluster shows that you can now set your
desired cruising speed. Another push will
turn the system completely off.
of your vehicle, do not use the
cruise control when driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or
winding roads.
When the ignition switch is turned off, the
system automatically turned off. To use
the cruise control again, press the “ON−
OFF” button again to turn it on.
176
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you need acceleration—for example,
when passing—depress the accelerator
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed
the set speed. When you release it, the
vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging the
cruise control, keep the “ON−OFF”
button off when not using the cruise
control.
CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED
You can cancel the preset speed by:
a. Pulling the
direction.
lever
in
the
“CANCEL”
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
c. Pressing the “ON−OFF” button.
SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED
The transmission must be in the “D” position or the shift range position must be “4”
(fourth range) or “5” (fifth range) in “S”
mode before you set the cruise control
speed.
Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,
push the lever down in the “− SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle
at that speed. If the speed is not satisfactory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,
or tap it down for a slower speed. Each
tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h
(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If cancelled by c., the “CRUISE” indicator
light goes off in the instrument panel. In
this case, the present speed data is
cleared, and you must set the speed from
the beginning.
In the following cases, the preset speed
automatically cancels out:
a. When vehicle speed falls below about
40 km/h (25 mph).
b. When vehicle stability control is activated.
c. When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10
mph) below the preset speed.
177
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If cancelled by c., the present speed data
is cleared, and you must set the speed
from the beginning.
If the preset speed automatically cancels
out for other than the above reasons, do
not operate the cruise control. Although it
is no problem to continue driving, have
your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer at the earliest opportunity.
RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED
Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction
and hold it. Release the lever when the
desired speed is attained. While the lever
is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can
be increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time
by pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”
direction quickly within 0.5 seconds.
However, a faster way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then push the
lever down in the “− SET” direction.
RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED
RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED
Push the lever down in the “− SET” direction and hold it. Release the lever when
the desired speed is attained. While the
lever is held down, the vehicle speed will
gradually decrease.
If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling
the control lever or by depressing the
brake pedal or by activating the vehicle
stability control system, pushing the lever
up in the “+ RES” direction will restore
the speed set prior to cancellation.
When the difference is 5 km/h (3 mph) or
more, the vehicle will cruise with its
actual speed. When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph),
the set speed can be lowered 1.6 km/h (1
mph) each time by pushing the lever down
in the “− SET” direction quickly within 0.5
seconds.
However, a faster way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then push the
lever down in the “− SET” direction.
Even if you downshift the transmission
from the “D” position or “5” (fifth range)
to “4” (fourth range) in “S” mode with the
cruise control on, engine braking will not
be enabled because the cruise control is
not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle
speed, reset to a slower speed with the
cruise control lever or depress the brake
pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise
control is cancelled.
178
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the preset speed is cancelled when vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25
mph), the preset speed will be resumed
by pushing the control lever up in the “+
RES” direction when vehicle speed exceeds about 40 km/h (25 mph) again.
CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING
If “CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes when using the
cruise control, press the “ON−OFF” button
to turn the system off and then push it
again to turn it on.
If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some trouble in the cruise
control system.
The indicator light does not come on.
The indicator light flashes again.
The indicator light goes out after it
comes on.
If this is the case, contact your Toyota
dealer and have your vehicle inspected.
Dynamic laser cruise control—
Dynamic laser cruise control allows you
to drive at a selected cruising speed
over about 45 km/h (28 mph) with your
foot off the accelerator pedal, maintaining an appropriate vehicle−to−vehicle
distance.
1. Cruise control switch
2. Distance switch
3. “CRUISE” indicator light
4. “NORM.” indicator light
(conventional cruise control mode
indicator light)
CAUTION
Do not rely excessively on dynamic
laser cruise control in order to avoid
serious injury or death, or to prevent
accidents or to control the vehicle’s
speed in emergency situations. Do
not use cruise control except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.
Always drive carefully and attentively.
Before using dynamic laser cruise
control, read and understand the following instructions.
5. Display
6. Master warning light
7. “READY” indicator light
(ready mode indicator light)
Steering wheel
Instrument cluster
179
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Dynamic laser cruise control
modes
—Vehicle−to−vehicle distance
control mode
The dynamic laser cruise control function has two cruise control modes.
Vehicle−to−vehicle
distance
control
mode for maintaining an appropriate
distance between vehicles
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising at preset speeds
Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode
The laser radar sensor in this system
primarily detects the reflectors of the
vehicle ahead of you to determine the
presence of the vehicle ahead as well
as measuring the vehicle−to−vehicle distance. The detection range of the sensor is about 120 m (400 ft.) ahead.
You can change the mode by using the
control lever.
CAUTION
The two cruise control modes function differently. If you use dynamic laser cruise
control, always confirm which mode is selected.
Dynamic laser cruise control is not a
collision−avoidance system and will
not prevent accidents. Dynamic laser
cruise control is a vehicle speed control device that is intended for use
only on freeways or roads where the
traffic is light or moderate. To avoid
serious injury, you must use caution
and be attentive to road and traffic
conditions while using dynamic laser
cruise control.
For the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control
mode, see “—Vehicle−to−vehicle distance
control mode” on page 180. For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode, see “—Conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode” on page 191.
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode
180
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
DYNAMIC LASER
OPERATIONS
CRUISE
CONTROL
The dynamic laser cruise control function operates automatically and depending on whether a vehicle is detected
ahead may change the speed of your
vehicle as follows.
If no vehicle is running ahead of you—
1. Cruising at a fixed speed: If there is
no vehicle detected ahead, your
cruising speed is maintained at the
preset speed from about 45 km/h (28
mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph). The
preset speed is displayed in the
display. For the vehicle speed setting,
see “SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED”
on page 185.
If a vehicle is detected ahead of you—
2. Deceleration cruising function: If a
slower moving vehicle is detected
ahead of you, your vehicle cruising
speed decreases within the range of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) to about 135
km/h (85 mph). The display shows the
preset speed, the detected vehicle
ahead and selected vehicle−to−vehicle
distance. If your vehicle gets closer to
the vehicle ahead because of insufficient automatic deceleration, then the
alarm warns you to also manually apply brakes.
3. Follow−up cruising function: After deceleration, your vehicle cruising speed
changes in proportion to the speed of
the vehicle ahead to maintain an appropriate distance from your vehicle to
the vehicle ahead. The vehicle−to−vehicle distance can be changed. For details, see “CHANGING VEHICLE−TO−
VEHICLE DISTANCE” on page 187.
4. Acceleration cruising function: If the
vehicle ahead changes lanes, your vehicle cruising speed will be gradually
increased up to the preset speed, and
your vehicle resumes fixed−speed
cruising.
181
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
This system operates by detecting primarily the reflectors of the vehicle
ahead. The distance may not be accurately or absolutely detected in the following cases:
The vehicle ahead has higher ground
clearance, which means that the
placement of the reflectors is in a
higher position.
CAUTION
CAUTION
To avoid accidents, always keep the
laser radar sensor glass clean and
never allow it to be covered with
icicle or any substance, so it can detect the vehicle in front. (See “LASER
RADAR SENSOR” on page 189.)
Do not rely excessively on dynamic
laser cruise control. Observe the following precautions in order to avoid
serious injury or death:
The rear section of the vehicle ahead
is extremely dirty.
The vehicle ahead or other vehicles
around you are flinging up water or
snow.
Excessive exhaust gas (black smoke)
Under certain conditions where the
vehicle in front slows drastically, or
is stopped, the dynamic laser cruise
control will neither warn you nor
decelerate. You must depress the
brake pedal to slow down, ensuring
collision avoidance or that sufficient vehicle−to−vehicle distance is
maintained.
Do not use dynamic laser cruise
is coming from the vehicle ahead or
other vehicles around you, obscuring
your front view.
control in the following conditions:
In bad weather (such as rain, fog,
snow, sandstorms or direct sunlight, or when raindrops or snowflakes get on the laser radar sensor
glass), the vehicle−to−vehicle distance will not be measured accurately.
There is an obstruction (protective
film, sticker, etc.) on the reflectors
on the vehicle ahead, or reflectors
are not installed on the vehicle
ahead or are damaged.
Heavy
luggage in
the luggage
compartment or rear seats is causing the nose of your vehicle to tilt
up.
When using the windshield wipers
at high or low speeds the dynamic
laser radar cruise control turns off.
182
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
On roads with heavy traffic or
sharp bends, an appropriate speed
cannot be maintained and an accident may occur.
On slippery road surfaces (icy or
snow−covered road surfaces), the
tires will race and you will be unable to control the vehicle.
When there is no vehicle detected
ahead on steep downhill slopes, the
preset speed will be easily exceeded because of inefficient engine
braking. (In this case, automatic
braking will not work.) If there is a
vehicle detected ahead, the delay in
deceleration timing could cause serious injury or death.
On roads with steep and short inclines and declines, failure to detect the vehicle ahead will shorten
the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead and an accident may occur.
Deceleration cruising function and
approach warning do not operate
when the vehicle ahead is at a stop
or driving very slowly.
If the vehicle ahead of you decelerates abruptly or if another vehicle
cuts in ahead of you, your vehicle
may collide with the vehicle ahead
unless you manually depress the
brake pedal to slow down your vehicle.
Depending on the road configuration (curved, left and right continuous curved, the start or end of a
curve, or narrow driving lanes due
to road construction) or your vehicle condition (steering wheel maneuvering, position in the lane, or
unstable driving because of an accident or breakdown), vehicles in other lanes or surrounding objects
may be detected, resulting in a control failure or the approach warning
activation. This may also result in
a very close distance between vehicles due to a failure to detect the
vehicle ahead.
When the alarm sounds frequently
(because acceleration or deceleration was repeated or sufficient vehicle−to−vehicle distance was not
maintained), an appropriate vehicle
speed cannot be attained and an
accident may occur.
183
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Dynamic laser cruise control should not
be used in circumstances which are inappropriate for any cruise control, such as
entering free way on−ramps or off−ramps.
CAUTION
Do not use dynamic laser cruise
control when exiting from or when
entering or merging onto a freeway.
When you are following a slower
moving vehicle and exiting, the sensor does not detect the vehicle and
will accelerate to the preset speed.
If other vehicles are driving outside
of the laser radar detection range,
a delay in the detection of the vehicle cutting in at short range or
failure to detect a motorcycle running on the side of the same lane
will occur. In this case, the dynamic
laser cruise control system will not
function properly.
When a slower vehicle in front of
you leaves the lane, the dynamic
laser cruise control will no longer
detect a vehicle ahead and will attempt to accelerate the vehicle to
the faster preset speed.
184
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON
To operate dynamic laser cruise control,
press the “ON−OFF” button. This turns the
system on. When the “CRUISE” and
“READY” indicator lights in the instrument
cluster come on, you can now set your
desired cruising speed and vehicle−to−vehicle distance. Pressing the “ON−OFF”
button again will turn the system completely off.
When the ignition is turned off, the system
is also automatically turned off. To use
dynamic laser cruise control again, press
the “ON−OFF” button again to turn it on.
When the ignition is turned off, all the
preset data is cleared. When you use the
dynamic laser cruise control again, you
need to reset the data.
If you need to accelerate—for example,
when passing—depress the accelerator
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed
the preset speed. When you release the
accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to
the control prior to acceleration.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging the
cruise control, keep the “ON−OFF”
button off when not using the dynamic laser cruise control.
SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED
The transmission must be in the “D” position or the shift range position must be “4”
(fourth range) or “5” (fifth range) in “S”
mode before you set the cruise control
speed.
Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,
push the lever down in the “− SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle
at that speed. At this time, the display
indicates settings such as the preset vehicle speed, whether a vehicle is present
ahead and selected vehicle−to−vehicle distance. If there is no vehicle detected
ahead, the display does not indicate the
vehicle ahead. You can now take your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
You cannot set a desired speed if the
master warning light comes on, the alarm
sounds and the display indicates one of
the warning codes “C1”, “C2” or “E3”. If
any of the above codes appears on the
display,
see
“VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE
DISTANCE CONTROL MODE FAILURE
WARNING” on page 190.
CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED
You can cancel the preset speed by doing
any of the following:
a. Pulling the
direction.
lever
in
the
“CANCEL”
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
c. Pressing the “ON−OFF” button.
If cancelled by a. or b., the “READY”
indicator comes on and the dynamic laser
cruise control enters the ready mode.
If cancelled by c., the “CRUISE” indicator
light goes off in the instrument panel. In
this case, the preset speed data is
cleared, and you must set the speed from
the beginning.
185
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
In the following cases, the preset speed
automatically cancels out:
a. When vehicle speed falls below about
40 km/h (25 mph).
b. When vehicle stability control is activated.
If cancelled by a. or b., the “READY”
indicator comes on and the dynamic laser
cruise control enters the ready mode.
If one of the warning codes “C1”, “C2” or
“E3” appears on the display, the preset
speed automatically cancels out. See
“VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE
DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING” on
page 190.
If the preset speed automatically cancels
out for other than the above reasons, do
not operate the dynamic laser cruise control. Although there is no problem to continue driving, please contact your Toyota
dealer.
RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED
RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED
Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction
and hold it. The displayed speed will increase in increments of 5 mph. Release
the lever when the desired speed is attained. The vehicle speed will gradually increase to the display speed.
Push the lever down in the “− SET” direction and hold it. The displayed speed will
decrease in increments of 5 mph. Release
the lever when the desired speed is attained. The vehicle speed will gradually decrease to the display speed.
CAUTION
However, a faster way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then push the
lever down in the “− SET” direction.
When the vehicle−to−vehicle distance
control is on, your cruising speed is
regulated in proportion to the speed
of the vehicle ahead, so increasing
the preset speed using the control
lever does not accelerate the vehicle.
However, if the vehicle ahead leaves
the lane, your cruising speed will increase to the preset speed because
the preset speed has been set higher
using the control lever. Confirm the
setting on the display.
186
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the control lever is released when the
vehicle speed exceeds the upper limit of
the preset speed traveling downhill while
you are pushing the lever down, the system will memorize the upper limit of the
preset speed as a preset speed.
Even if you downshift the transmission
from “D” position or “5” (fifth range) to “4”
(fourth range) in “S” mode in the vehicle−
to−vehicle distance control mode, engine
braking will not be enabled because this
mode is not cancelled. To decrease the
vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed
with the cruise control lever or depress
the brake pedal. If you use the brake
pedal, cruise control is cancelled.
RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED
CHANGING
DISTANCE
If the preset speed has been cancelled,
when you push the lever up in the
“+ RES” direction while the “READY” indicator in the instrument cluster comes on
at a vehicle speed of more than 40 km/h
(25 mph), the speed set prior to cancellation will be restored.
VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE
You can select one of the following vehicle−to−vehicle distances.
1. LONG
2. MIDDLE
3. SHORT
Each time you push the distance switch
briefly, the setting changes from LONG to
MIDDLE to SHORT and then back to
LONG. You can confirm the setting on the
display.
During follow−up cruising, if there are no
vehicles
ahead because
they have
changed lanes, your vehicle will accelerate
gradually up to the preset speed. At this
time, pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”
direction will quickly speed up your vehicle in vehicle−to−vehicle distance control
mode.
Your vehicle speed changes in proportion
to the speed of the vehicle ahead, maintaining the selected distance. However, if
the vehicle ahead is slower, the selected
distance will be shorter than the designated distance.
When the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode is activated or the “READY”
indicator comes on, the vehicle−to−vehicle
distance setting can be changed.
The vehicle−to−vehicle distance is always
set to LONG when the ignition switch is
turned on.
187
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Select the vehicle−to−vehicle distance considering traffic conditions. The approximate
vehicle−to−vehicle distance based on time
interval when driving at 88 km/h (55 mph)
is shown below:
Braking control is operating only when the
vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode
is selected and your vehicle speed exceeds about 40 km/h (25 mph). If the
speed decreases below about 40 km/h (25
mph), braking control will cease, requiring
the manual application of brakes.
LONG . . . . . . . . . . . about 75 m (245 ft.)
MIDDLE . . . . . . . . . . about 50 m (165 ft.)
SHORT . . . . . . . . . . about 30 m (100 ft.)
CAUTION
If the vehicle speed is slower than 88
km/h (55 mph), the distance will be shorter than the above.
During long downhill driving, the vehicle−
to−vehicle distance will be shorter than
the selected distance.
BRAKING CONTROL
Dynamic laser cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. If the approach
warning is activated, depress the brake
pedal to decelerate to ensure an appropriate vehicle−to−vehicle distance.
If you are getting closer to the vehicle
ahead at a relatively higher speed than
that of the vehicle ahead or if engine
braking cannot be applied properly, braking control is automatically activated. At
this time, the display flashes.
188
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Braking control will not ensure that
your vehicle will reduce speed appropriately. You must depress the
brake pedal to slow down, ensuring
collision avoidance or that sufficient
vehicle−to−vehicle distance is maintained.
APPROACH WARNING
While you are cruising in the vehicle−to−
vehicle distance control mode, if the vehicle ahead decelerates abruptly or if
another vehicle cuts in ahead of you, inadequate braking will make your vehicle
become closer to the vehicle ahead of you
and the display will flash and beep.
Before driving in the vehicle−to−vehicle
distance control mode, make sure the
radar sensor glass is clean.
CAUTION
If the display flashes and beeps,
you must depress the brake pedal
to slow down to avoid a collision
or maintain sufficient vehicle−to−vehicle distance.
This product is a class I laser product
complied with 21 C.F.R part 1040.10
and 1040.11.
In the following conditions, the approach warning may not turn on
even if the vehicle drives closer to
the vehicle ahead, and an accident
may occur:
Your vehicle and the vehicle ahead
are cruising at almost the same
speed.
The vehicle ahead is cruising at a
faster speed than yours. (The distance between the vehicles will become longer.)
The vehicle ahead is at a stop or
driving very slowly. Pay special
attention to a very slow vehicle at
the end of the line in heavy traffic
or at a tollgate.
The speed has just been set.
The accelerator pedal is depressed
or has just been released.
CAUTION
To ensure that dynamic laser cruise
control will function properly while
driving, observe the following:
LASER RADAR SENSOR
The laser radar sensor is used for vehicle−to−vehicle distance control cruising.
If dirt is on the sensor glass, the
dynamic laser cruise control function is
automatically cancelled and a warning
code appears on the display. (See
“VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE
DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING”
described below.)
However, if the glass sensor is covered
with icicle or any substance, dirt may
not be detected.
Always keep the laser radar sensor
glass clean. When cleaning, use a
soft cloth and be careful not to
damage the sensor.
Avoid strong impacts around the laser radar sensor. An incorrect laser
radar sensor alignment will result in
system malfunction. A special device is required to adjust the laser
radar sensor alignment. Be sure to
have the sensor adjusted by your
Toyota dealer.
Do not affix a sticker (including a
transparent sticker) or attach an accessory around the laser radar sensor.
189
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If “C1” appears on the display, the system cannot easily measure the vehicle−to−
vehicle distance because of a dirty laser
radar sensor glass while the dynamic laser cruise control is on.
If this code appears, clean the sensor
glass with a soft cloth and try setting the
preset speed again. If the dirt is removed
without cleaning, the system will automatically enter the ready mode.
VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE
DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING
If there is trouble somewhere in the dynamic laser cruise control while the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode is
on, the master warning light comes on
and the alarm sounds, and one of the
warning codes “C1”, “C2” or “E3” will appear on the display. Dynamic laser cruise
control is automatically cancelled.
If the system does not enter the ready
mode even after cleaning or the code remains on the display, the system might be
malfunctioning. Although there is no problem to continue driving, please contact
your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
Always keep the sensor glass and
never allow it to be covered with
icicle or any substance, so it can detect the vehicle in front.
If “E3” appears on the display, the
“CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument
cluster also flashes.
190
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If “C2” appears on the display, the system cannot easily measure the vehicle−to−
vehicle distance because of the following
conditions:
The wipers are operating at high or low
speeds
Direct sunlight from the front
It is difficult to make a measurement
because of bad weather (such as rainy,
foggy, or snowy weather)
In the following cases, dynamic laser
cruise control switches to the ready mode:
The
wipers are stopped or
switched to intermittent operation.
are
No direct sunlight from the front
In the above conditions, push the lever up
in the “+ RES” direction and release it.
Dynamic laser cruise control will be restored. If the setting operation cannot be
performed or if the warning code still appears even after the weather clears, the
system might have malfunctioned. Although there is no problem to continue
driving, please contact your Toyota dealer.
—Conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode
If “E3” appears on the display, a system
malfunction has been detected.
If this code appears, stop your vehicle in
a safe place, turn the ignition off, and
then restart it to reset the system. If the
setting still cannot be made or the same
code appears again, the system might
have malfunctioned. Although there is no
problem to continue driving, please contact your Toyota dealer.
This mode allows you to cruise at a
desired speed over about 40 km/h (25
mph) with your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Your cruising speed can be maintained up
or down grades within the limits of engine
performance, although a slight speed
change may occur when driving up or
down the grades. On steeper hills, a
greater speed change will occur so it is
better to drive without the cruise control.
CAUTION
In the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, the approach
warning does not activate and no
alarm will sound even if you are
too close to the vehicle ahead, as
neither the presence of the vehicle
ahead nor the vehicle−to−vehicle
distance is detected. Pay special
attention to the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always confirm the setting in the
display.
Do not use the conventional (fixed
speed) mode in the following conditions, or serious injury or death
could result:
To help maintain maximum control
of your vehicle, do not use conventional cruise control mode when using dynamic laser cruise control
while driving in heavy or varying
traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or
snow−covered) or winding roads.
Avoid vehicle speed increasing
when driving downhill. If the vehicle
speed is too fast in relation to the
preset speed in the conventional
cruise control mode, cancel the
conventional cruise control mode
and then downshift the transmission to use engine braking to slow
down.
191
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
However, once the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode activates and is used,
it cannot be changed to the conventional
cruise control mode using the above operation. To change the mode, press the
“ON−OFF” button to turn the system off
and then press it again to turn it on. Next
push the lever in the “MODE” direction for
longer than about 1 second.
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON
To operate conventional cruise control
mode, press the “ON−OFF” button. This
turns the system on. The “CRUISE” and
“READY” indicator lights in the instrument
cluster comes on. Push the lever in the
“MODE” direction for longer than 1 second
to change to conventional cruise control
mode. The indicator in the instrument
cluster is as shown. You can now set
your desired cruising speed. Pressing the
“ON−OFF” button again will turn the system completely off.
To change to the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode from the conventional
cruise control mode, push the lever in the
“MODE” direction for longer than about 1
second.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging the
cruise control, keep the “ON−OFF”
button off when not using dynamic
laser cruise control.
192
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED
The transmission must be in the “D” position, “5” (fifth range) or “4” (fourth range)
in “S” mode before you set the cruise
control speed in the conventional cruise
control mode.
Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,
push the lever down in the “− SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle
at that speed and the display shows the
preset speed. You can now take your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
If you need to accelerate—for example,
when passing—depress the accelerator
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed
the preset speed. When you release the
accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to
the speed set prior to acceleration.
You cannot set a desired speed if the
master warning light comes on, the alarm
sounds and the display indicates the
warning code “E3”. If this code appears
on
the
display,
see
“VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE
DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING” on
page 190.
CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED
You can cancel the preset speed by doing
any of the following:
a. Pulling the
direction.
lever
in
the
“CANCEL”
In the following cases, the preset speed
automatically cancels out:
a. When vehicle speed falls below about
40km/h (25 mph).
b. When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10
mph) below the preset speed.
c. When vehicle stability control is activated.
If cancelled by b., the preset speed data
is cleared and you must set the speed
from the beginning.
If the preset speed automatically cancels
out for other than the above reasons, do
not operate the cruise control. Although it
is no problem to continue driving, have
your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer at the earliest opportunity.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
c. Pressing the “ON−OFF” button.
RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED
Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction
and hold it. Release the lever when the
desired speed is attained. While the lever
is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can
be increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time
by pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”
direction quickly within 0.6 seconds.
However, a faster way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then push the
lever down in the “− SET” direction.
RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED
Push the lever down in the “− SET” direction and hold it. Release the lever when
the desired speed is attained. While the
lever is held down, the vehicle speed will
gradually decrease.
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can
be lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time
by pushing the lever down in the “− SET”
direction quickly within 0.6 seconds.
If cancelled by c., the “CRUISE” indicator
light goes off in the instrument panel. In
this case, the preset speed data is
cleared, and you must set the speed from
the beginning.
193
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
However, a faster way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then push the
lever down in the “− SET” direction.
Even if you downshift from “D” position or
“5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range) in “S”
mode in the conventional cruise control
mode, engine braking will not be enabled
because this mode is not cancelled. To
decrease the vehicle’s speed, reset to a
slower speed with the cruise control lever
or depress the brake pedal. If you use the
brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.
RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED
If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling
the lever, by depressing the brake pedal
or by activating the vehicle stability control system, pushing the lever up in the
“+ RES” direction will restore the speed
set prior to cancellation.
If the preset speed is cancelled when vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25
mph), the preset speed will be resumed
by pushing the control lever up in the “+
RES” direction when vehicle speed exceeds about 40 km/h (25 mph) again.
CONVENTIONAL
CRUISE
MODE FAILURE WARNING
CONTROL
If there is trouble in the conventional
cruise control mode, the “CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes,
the master warning light comes on and
the alarm sounds, the warning code “E3”
will appear on the display.
If a system malfunction is detected when
the conventional cruise control mode is in
the ready mode or operating, the master
warning light comes on, an alarm sounds
and the above code appears.
If this code appears, press the “ON−OFF”
button to turn the system off and then
push it again to turn it on. If the setting
still cannot be made or the same code
appears again, the system might have
malfunctioned. Although there is no problem to continue driving, please contact
your Toyota dealer.
194
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
1− 8
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Audio system
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using your audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
196
197
221
222
For information about the speech command system of a vehicle
equipped with navigation system, please refer to the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
195
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Reference
Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player
(with cassette player controller)
Type 2: AM·FM radio/compact disc player
with changer (with cassette player controller)
Type 3: AM·FM radio/compact disc player
with changer (with cassette player and
XM satellite radio∗ controller)
∗:
196
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Use of satellite radio requires XM
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
Using your audio system—
—Some basics
This section describes some of the basic
features on Toyota audio systems. Some
information may not pertain to your system.
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off.
Push “AM”, “AM/SAT”∗, “FM”, “TAPE” or
“DISC” to turn on that function without
pushing “PWR·VOL”.
Your audio system works when the ignition
switch is set at ACC or ON.
You can turn on each player by inserting
a cassette tape or compact disc.
OPENING THE AUDIO COVER
Push the button to open the audio cover.
You can turn off each player by ejecting
the cassette tape or compact disc. If the
audio system was previously off, then the
entire audio system will be turned off
when you eject the cassette tape or compact disc. If another function was previously playing, it will come on again.
∗:
Use of satellite radio requires XM
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS
Push “AM”, “AM/SAT”∗, “FM”, “TAPE” or
“DISC” if the system is already on but you
want to switch from one function to another.
∗:
Use of satellite radio requires XM
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
197
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
LISTENING TO THE XM SATELLITE
RADIO BROADCAST∗ (type 3)
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in
your vehicle, an additional genuine Toyota
satellite receiver and antenna (or equivalents) must be purchased and installed. A
subscription to the XM satellite radio service is also necessary.
How to subscribe to an XM satellite
radio
An XM satellite radio is a tuner designed
exclusively to receive broadcasts provided
under a separate subscription. Availability
is limited to the 48 contiguous states.
How to subscribe:
You must enter into a separate service
agreement with the XM radio in order to
receive satellite broadcast programming in
the vehicle. Additional activation and service subscription fees apply that are not
included in the purchase price of the vehicle and optional digital satellite tuner.
For complete information on subscription
rates and terms, or to subscribe to the
XM radio, visit XM on the web at
www.xmradio.com or call an XM’s Listener Care at (800) 967−2346. The XM radio is solely responsible for the quality,
availability and content of the satellite radio services provided, which are subject
to the terms and conditions of the XM
radio customer service agreement.
Customers should have their radio ID
ready; the radio ID can be found by tuning to “channel 000” on the radio. For
details, see “Displaying the radio ID” below.
All fees and programming are the responsibility of the XM satellite radio and are
subject to change.
198
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Satellite tuner technology notice:
Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awarded
Type Approval Certificates from XM Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility
with the services offered by the XM satellite radio.
Displaying the radio ID
Each XM tuner is identified with a unique
radio ID. You will need the radio ID when
activating XM service or when reporting
a problem.
If you select the “CH 000” using the
“TUNE” knob, the ID code of 8 alphanumeric characters appears. If you select
another channel, display of the ID code is
canceled. The channel (000) alternates the
display between the radio ID and the specific radio ID code.
∗:
Use of satellite radio requires XM
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
TONE AND BALANCE
YOUR RADIO ANTENNA
For details about your system’s tone and
balance controls, see the description of
your own system.
Your vehicle has an antenna printed on
the inside of the rear window.
Type 1 and type 2 audio systems utilize
FOCUS and TruBass audio enhancement technologies, under license from
SRS Labs, Inc., in all mode except AM
radio mode.
NOTICE
Putting a film (especially a conductive
or metallic film) on the rear window
will noticeably reduce the sensitivity
of the radio.
Tone
How good an audio program sounds to
you is largely determined by the mix of
the treble, midrange (type 3 only), and
bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, midrange
and bass.
YOUR AUDIO DISPLAY
The audio information is displayed on the
center display.
Balance
A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound
levels is also important.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to
a stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.
199
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)
When you insert a disc, gently push it in
with the label side up. The player will play
from track 1 through to the end of the
disc. Then it will play from track 1 again.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.
NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.
YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER
NOTICE
Push the button to open the cover for the
cassette player.
YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH
CHANGER (type 2 and 3)
When you insert a cassette, the exposed
tape should face to the right.
When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”
button and gently push the disc in with
the label side up. The player will play
from track 1 through to the end of the
disc. Then it will play from track 1 of the
next disc.
Push the “
” button to eject a cassette.
For instruction the player, see “—Controls
and features” described below.
NOTICE
The changer is intended for use with 12
cm (4.7 in.) discs only.
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the cassette player. Do not
insert anything other than cassette
tapes into the slot.
200
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not stack up two discs for insertion, or it will cause damage to
the compact disc changer. Insert
only one compact disc into slot at
a time.
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.
—Controls and features
Type 1
Details of specific buttons, controls, and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.
201
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
(Reverse/Fast−forward button)
AUDIO CONT (Tone and sound balance
adjustment function)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
Cassette player
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE” or
“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the button
until you hear a beep—this will set the
station to the button. The preset button
number will appear on the display.
Push “
” (preset button 6) to fast−forward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on
the display. Push “
” (preset button 5)
to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on
the display.
To stop the tape while it is fast−forward-
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The preset button number and station frequency will appear on the display.
ing, push “
” or “TAPE” button. To stop
the tape while it is rewinding, push “
”
or “TAPE” button.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.
This radio can store one AM and two FM
for each button. (The display will show
“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you push
“AM” or “FM” button.)
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast−forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto−reverse feature.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.
(Eject button)
This button is used to eject a compact
disc.
Compact disc player
” (preset button 6) or
Push and hold “
“
” (preset button 5) to fast−forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
AM
Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio
and select the AM band. The indicator
light will come on and “AM” will appear on
the display.
202
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Each time you push the “AUDIO CONT”
knob, the mode changes. To adjust the
tone and balance, turn the knob.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
DISC (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC” button to play a compact
disc. The indicator light will come on.
When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently
being played.
B NR∗
Error messages
Dolby
If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.
If you are listening to a tape that was
recorded with Dolby B Noise Reduction,
push “ ” (preset button 1). “ ” will appear on the display. Push the button again
to turn off Dolby B NR.
Push “PROG” (preset button 4) to select
the other side of a cassette tape. The
display indicates which side is currently
selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”
indicates the bottom side).
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise
by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with this button on
or off according to the mode used to record the tape.
Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
automatically reverses and begins to play
the other side. This is true whether the
cassette was playing or fast forwarding.
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.
“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.
“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of
separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.
“ERROR 4”: Over−current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.
Ask
your
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
∗
: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the
double D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
FM
Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio
and select the FM band. The indicator
light will come on and “FM1” or “FM2” will
appear on the display. This system allows
you to set twelve FM, two for each of the
preset button.
PROG (Program)
PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.
RAND (Random)
Push “RAND” (preset button 3) to listen
the tracks on the disc in random order.
“RAND” will appear on the display and the
player will perform the tracks on the disc
you are listening to in random order. To
turn off the random feature, push this button again.
203
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
RPT (Repeat)
Cassette player
Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the
track is playing. “RPT” will appear on the
display. When the track ends, it will automatically rewind and replay. To turn off the
repeat feature, push this button again.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks in order for the repeat feature to work correctly.
Compact disc player
Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the
track is playing. “RPT” will appear on the
display. When the track ends, it will automatically replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.
SCAN
Radio
You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
the next preset station up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
next preset station. To stop scanning,
push this button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. The radio will find the next station up
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
and then scan again to the next station.
To stop scanning, push this button again.
Compact disc player
Push the “SCAN” button to scan the
tracks on a disc. “SCAN” will appear on
the display and the player will scan all the
tracks on the disc you are listening to. To
stop scanning, push this button again. If
the player has scanned all the tracks on
the disc, it will stop scanning.
SEEK (Seeking)
Radio
In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.
To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “” or “” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button. Do this again to find the
station after that.
Cassette player
Use this button to skip up or down to
locate a song or recording.
You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).
204
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
A blank space of at least 3 seconds is
considered to be a start of a recording.
When the beginning of a tape is reached,
the player automatically resumes play.
When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.
In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken word, live, or classical
recordings.
ST (Stereo reception) display
Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.
TAPE
Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette
tape. The indicator light will come on.
TEXT
TUNE (Tuning)
This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step
up the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.
TRACK (Tracking up/down)
Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.
Push “” or “” side of the “TRACK”
button until the number of the track you
want to listen to appears on the display.
If you want to return to the beginning of
the current track, quickly push the down
side of the button one time.
205
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Type 2
Details of specific buttons, controls, and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.
206
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE” or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the station to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The preset button number and station frequency will appear on the display.
This radio can store one AM and two FM
for each button. (The display will show
“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you push
“AM” or “FM” button.)
(Eject button)
This button is used to eject one or all
compact discs.
To eject the current compact disc, push
and release the compact disc eject button.
To eject all discs at a time, press and
hold the eject button until you hear a
beep. The last compact disc played before
pushing the button will be ejected first. If
the ejected disc is not removed for a long
time, the eject function will be cancelled.
(Reverse/Fast−forward button)
Cassette player
” (preset button 6) to fast−forPush “
ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on
the display. Push “
” (preset button 5)
to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on
the display.
To stop the tape while it is fast−forwarding, push “
” or “TAPE” button. To stop
the tape while it is rewinding, push “
”
or “TAPE” button.
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast−forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto−reverse feature.
To eject a specific disc, push “” or “”
side of the “ DISC ” button until the
number of the disc you want to eject is
displayed. Push and release the eject button.
Compact disc player
” (preset button 6) or
Push and hold “
“
” (preset button 5) to fast−forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
AM
Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio
and select the AM band. The indicator
light will come on and “AM” will appear on
the display.
AUDIO CONT (Tone and sound balance
adjustment function)
Each time you push the “AUDIO CONT”
knob, the mode changes. To adjust the
tone and balance, turn the knob.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.
207
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
DISC (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC” button to play a compact
disc. The indicator light will come on.
When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently
being played.
Error messages
If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.
“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.
“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of
separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc or magazine.
Set the disc or magazine again.
“ERROR 4”: Over−current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.
Ask
your
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
DISC Use the “ DISC ” button to select a
disc you want to listen to.
Push “” or “” side of this button until
the number of the disc you want to listen
to appears on the display.
Dolby
B NR∗
If you are listening to a tape that was
recorded with Dolby B Noise Reduction,
push “ ” (preset button 1). “ ” will appear on the display. Push the button again
to turn off Dolby B NR.
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise
by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with this button on
or off according to the mode used to record the tape.
∗
: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the
double D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
lid of separate unit is open. Close the
compact disc changer lid.
208
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
FM
Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio
and select the FM band. The indicator
light will come on and “FM1” or “FM2” will
appear on the display. This system allows
you to set twelve FM, two for each of the
preset button.
LOAD
This button is used to load the compact
discs in the compact disc player. This
player can store up to six discs.
To load one compact
push and release the
a compact disc. After
the shutter of the slot
disc only, quickly
button, then insert
the disc is loaded,
will close.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.
To load multiple compact discs, push and
hold the button (until you hear a beep
when the audio system is on), then insert
the first compact disc. After the disc is
loaded, the shutter of the slot will close.
After a few seconds, the shutter will automatically open again so the next disc can
be inserted. The same process can be
applied for loading the rest of the discs.
If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”
will appear on the display.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.
PROG (Program)
Push “PROG” (preset button 4) to select
the other side of a cassette tape. The
display indicates which side is currently
selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”
indicates the bottom side).
Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
automatically reverses and begins to play
the other side. This is true whether the
cassette was playing or fast−forwarding.
PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.
RAND (Random)
RPT (Repeat)
There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.
Cassette player
To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
button 3). “RAND” will appear on the display and the player will perform the tracks
on the disc you are listening to in random
order. To turn off the random feature, push
this button again.
To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
until you hear a beep. “ ” and “RAND”
will appear on the display and the player
will perform all the tracks on all the discs
in the magazine in random order. To turn
off the random feature, push this button
again.
Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the
track is playing. “RPT” will appear on the
display. When the track ends, it will automatically rewind and replay. To turn off the
repeat feature, push this button again.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks in order for the repeat feature to work correctly.
Compact disc player
There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing. “RPT”
will appear on the display. When the track
ends, it will automatically replay. To turn
off the repeat feature, push this button
again.
209
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “ ” and “RPT” will
appear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are
listening to. When the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the first
track on the disc and replay. To turn off
the repeat feature, push this button again.
SCAN
Radio
You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
the next preset station up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
next preset station. To stop scanning,
push this button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. The radio will find the next station up
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
and then scan again to the next station.
To stop scanning, push this button again.
Compact disc player
There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.
Scanning the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” will appear on the display
and the player will scan all the tracks on
the disc you are listening to. To stop
scanning, push this button again. If the
player has scanned all the tracks on the
disc, it will stop scanning.
Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a
beep. “ ” and “SCAN” will appear on the
display and the player will scan the first
track of the next disc. To stop scanning,
push this button again. If the player has
scanned all the discs, it will stop scanning.
SEEK/TRACK
down)
(Seeking/Track
up
or
Radio
In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.
To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “” or “” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button. Do this again to find the
station after that.
Cassette player
Use this button to skip up or down to
locate a song or recording.
You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).
A blank space of at least 3 seconds is
considered to be a start of a recording.
When the beginning of a tape is reached,
the player automatically resumes play.
When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.
In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken word, live, or classical
recordings.
210
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Compact disc player
TEXT
Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.
This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
Push “” or “” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until the number of the
track you want to listen to appears on the
display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, quickly push the
down side of the button one time.
ST (Stereo reception) display
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.
Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.
If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
TAPE
Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step
up the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.
Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette
tape. The indicator light will come on.
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.
TUNE (Tuning)
211
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Type 3
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.
212
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE” or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the station to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The preset button number and station frequency will appear on the display.
This radio can store one AM and two FM
stations for each button. (The display will
show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you
push “AM/SAT” or “FM” button.)
XM satellite radio∗—
To recall a preset channel: Push the button for the channel you want. The preset
button number and channel number will
appear on the display.
This radio can store three XM channels
for each button. (The display will show
“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push
“AM/SAT” button.)
∗:
Use of satellite radio requires XM
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
(Eject button)
This button is used to eject one or all
compact discs.
To eject the current compact disc, push
and release the compact disc eject button.
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio channels.
To eject a specific disc, push either side
of the “DISC/TYPE” button until the number of the disc you want to eject is displayed. Push and release the eject button.
To preset a channel to a button: Tune in
the desired channel. (See “TUNE” or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the channel to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.
To eject all discs at a time, press and
hold the eject button until you hear a
beep. The last compact disc played before
pushing the button will be ejected first. If
the ejected disc is not removed for a long
time, the eject function will be cancelled.
(Reverse/Fast−forward button)
Cassette player
Push “
” (preset button 6) to fast−forward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on
the display. Push “
” (preset button 5)
to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on
the display.
To stop the tape while it is fast−forwarding, push “
” or “TAPE” button. To stop
the tape while it is rewinding, push “
”
or “TAPE” button.
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast−forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto−reverse feature.
Compact disc player
” (preset button 6) or
Push and hold “
“
” (preset button 5) to fast−forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
213
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AM/SAT∗ (AM and Satellite radio)
“UPDATING”:
Push the “AM/SAT” button to turn on the
radio and select the AM band. The indicator light will come on and “AM” will appear
on the display.
You have not subscribed to the XM
XM satellite radio—
Push the “AM/SAT” button to turn on the
radio and select the XM band. “SAT1”,
“SAT2” or “SAT3” will appear on the display. This system allows you to set eighteen XM channels, three for each of the
preset button.
Error messages
If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,
your audio system will display following
error messages.
“ANTENNA”:
The XM antenna is not connected.
Check whether the XM antenna cable
is attached securely.
A short−circuit occurs in the antenna or
the surrounding antenna cable. See a
Toyota certified dealer.
satellite radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.
Contact the XM satellite radio for subscription information. When a contact is
canceled, you can choose the “CH000”
and all free−to−air channels.
The premium channel you selected is
not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does
not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the
premium channel, contact the XM satellite radio.
“NO SIGNAL”: The XM signal is too
weak at the current location. Wait until
your vehicle reaches a location with a
stronger signal.
“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audio
or program information. Wait until the unit
has received the information.
214
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected is
not broadcasting any programming. Select
another channel.
“− − −”: The channel you selected is no
longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds
until the radio returns to the previous
channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel.
The XM Listener Care Center is also
available on the phone, please call (800)
967−2346 during the following hours.
Monday—Saturday: 6 a.m.—2 a.m. Eastern time
Sunday: 8 a.m.—8 p.m. Eastern time
∗:
Use of satellite radio requires XM
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
AUDIO CONT (Tone and sound balance
adjustment function)
Each time you push the “AUDIO CONT”
knob, the mode changes. To adjust the
tone and balance, turn the knob.
Error messages
DISC/TYPE
If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.
Radio
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.
When you push the “” or “” side of
the “DISC/TYPE” button while receiving an
RDS station, the current program type appears on the display.
MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.
Each time you push “” or “” side of
this button, the program type changes as
in the following:
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of
separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc or magazine.
Set the disc or magazine again.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.
“ERROR 4”: Over−current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
SURROUND: Turn on or off the surround
function.
“SURROUND
ON”
or
“SURROUND OFF” on the display.
DISC (Compact disc)
Ask
your
“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
lid of separate unit is open. Close the
compact disc changer lid.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
Push the “DISC” button to play a compact
disc. The indicator light will come on.
When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently
being played.
NEWS
SPORTS
TALK
POP
ROCK
JAZZ
CLASSIC
OTHERS
INFORM (Information)
EASY LIS (Easy listening)
CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)
R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
RELIGION
ALERT (Emergency message)
215
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
With the program type displayed, push the
“SEEK/TRACK” or “SCAN” button. You can
seek or scan for the station broad casting
the same type of program.
XM satellite radio∗—
When you push the “” or “” side of
the “DISC/TYPE” button while receiving a
XM channel, the current channel category
appears on the display.
When the channel category appears, push
either “” or “” side of this button to
switch to the next or previous category.
∗:
Use of satellite radio requires XM
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
Compact disc player
Use the “DISC/TYPE” button to select a
disc you want to listen to.
Push “” or “” side of the “DISC/TYPE”
button until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.
Dolby
B NR∗
If you are listening to a tape that was
recorded with Dolby B Noise Reduction,
push “ ” (preset button 1). “ ” will appear on the display. Push the button again
to turn off Dolby B NR.
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise
by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with this button on
or off according to the mode used to record the tape.
∗
: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the
double D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
FM
Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio
and select the FM band. The indicator
light will come on and “FM1” or “FM2” will
appear on the display. This system allows
you to set twelve FM stations, two for
each of the preset button.
LOAD
This button is used to load the compact
discs in the compact disc player. This
player can store up to six discs.
To load one compact
push and release the
a compact disc. After
the shutter of the slot
disc only, quickly
button, then insert
the disc is loaded,
will close.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.
To load multiple compact discs, push and
hold the button (until you hear a beep
when the audio system is on), then insert
the first compact disc. After the disc is
loaded, the shutter of the slot will close.
After a few seconds, the shutter will automatically open again so the next disc can
be inserted. The same process can be
applied for loading the rest of the discs.
If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”
will appear on the display.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.
216
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PROG (Program)
Push “PROG” (preset button 4) to select
the other side of a cassette tape. The
display indicates which side is currently
selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”
indicates the bottom side).
Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
automatically reverses and begins to play
the other side. This is true whether the
cassette was playing or fast−forwarding.
PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.
RAND (Random)
There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.
To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
button 3). “RAND” will appear on the display and the player will perform the tracks
on the disc you are listening to in random
order. To turn off the random feature, push
this button again.
To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
until you hear a beep. “ ” and “RAND”
will appear on the display and the player
will perform all the tracks on all the discs
in the magazine in random order. To turn
off the random feature, push this button
again.
RDS (Radio Data System) display
The radio will automatically switch to the
RDS mode to receive an RDS station
while turned to FM broadcasts. “RDS” will
appear on the display.
RPT (Repeat)
Cassette player
Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the
track is playing. “RPT” will appear on the
display. When the track ends, it will automatically rewind and replay. To turn off the
repeat feature, push this button again.
Compact disc player
There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing. “RPT”
will appear on the display. When the track
ends, it will automatically replay. To turn
off the repeat feature, push this button
again.
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “ ” and “RPT” will
appear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are
listening to. When the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the first
track on the disc and replay. To turn off
the repeat feature, push this button again.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks in order for the repeat feature to work correctly.
217
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SCAN
XM satellite radio∗—
Compact disc player
Radio
You can either scan the currently selected
channel category or scan only the preset
channels for that band.
There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.
You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
the next preset station up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
next preset station. To stop scanning,
push this button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. The radio will find the next station up
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
and then scan again to the next station.
To stop scanning, push this button again.
To scan the preset channels:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on the
display. The radio will tune in the next
preset channel up the band, stay there for
5 seconds, and then move to the next
preset channel. To stop scanning, push
this button again.
To scan the currently selected channel
category:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” appears on the display. The
radio will find the next channel in the
same channel category up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then scan again.
To stop scanning, push this button again.
∗:
Use of satellite radio requires XM
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
218
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Scanning the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” will appear on the display
and the player will scan all the tracks on
the disc you are listening to. To stop
scanning, push this button again. If the
player scanned all the tracks on the disc,
it will stop scanning.
Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a
beep. “ ” and “SCAN” will appear on the
display and the player will scan the first
track on the next disc. To stop scanning,
push this button again. If the player has
scanned all the discs, it will stop scanning.
Radio
When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.
In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.
In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken word, live, or classical
recordings.
To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “” or “” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button. Do this again to find the
station after that.
Compact disc player
SEEK/TRACK
down)
(Seeking/Tracking up or
XM satellite radio∗—
To select the next channel within
rent channel category, push the
“” side of the “SEEK/TRACK”
Repeat until a desired channel is
∗:
the cur“” or
button.
found.
Use of satellite radio requires XM
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
Cassette player
Use this button to skip up or down to
locate a song or recording.
You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).
A blank space of at least 3 seconds is
considered to be a start of a recording.
When the beginning of a tape is reached,
the player automatically resumes play.
Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.
Push “” or “” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until the number of the
track you want to listen to appears on the
display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, quickly push the
down side of the button one time.
ST (Stereo reception) display
Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.
TAPE
Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette
tape. The indicator light will come on.
TEXT
Radio
This button is operational in RDS mode.
When an RDS station transmits a text
message, “MSG” will appear on the displayed.
To display the text message, first push
the “TEXT” button to change the radio
station display. Then push the “TEXT” button once more to display, and the message will appear on the display.
If the entire the message is not displayed,
“ ” will appear on the display. To display
the rest of the message, push and hold
the “TEXT” button until you hear a beep.
After the entire message has been displayed, the message will disappear.
The message display will be canceled if
any button that affects the display is
pushed.
If no messages are received, “NO
MESSAGE” will appear on the display, and
the display returns to the previous mode.
The message display will be canceled if
you activate any function that affects the
display.
219
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
XM satellite radio∗1 —
Compact disc player
When you push the “TEXT” button, the
display changes as follows:
CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM
TITLE)
→
NAME
(ARTIST
NAME/FEATURE) → CH NUMBER → CH
NAME
This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be
displayed. (Some information will not be
fully displayed.)
The message display will be canceled if
any button that affects the display is
pushed.
If there is no song/program title or artist
name/feature associated with the channel
at that time, “− − − − −” will appear on the
display.
This XM tuner supports “Audio Services”
(Music and Talk) of only XM satellite
radio and “Text Information”∗2 linked to the
respective audio services.
∗1 :
∗2 :
Use of satellite radio requires XM
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
Text Information includes, Channel
Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and
Category Name.
If no traffic program station is found, “NO
TRAF INFO” appears on the display, and
the display returns to the previous mode
and a beep sound.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.
To cancel the traffic announcement, push
this button again.
If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
XM satellite radio∗—
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.
TRAF (Traffic)
This button turns the traffic announcement
(TA) feature on and off. This button is
operational only in FM mode.
By pushing the “TRAF” button, “TRAF
SEEK” will flash on the display and the
radio will seek a traffic program station.
After the traffic announcement program is
over, the display returns to the previous
mode.
220
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
TUNE (Tuning)
Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step
up the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.
Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step
up the channel. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the channel.
∗:
Use of satellite radio requires XM
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
Audio remote controls
(steering switches)
1. Volume control switch
XM satellite radio∗—
Push “+” side to increase the volume. The
volume continues to increase while the
switch is being pushed.
To select a preset channel, push the “”
or “” side of the switch. Repeat until a
desired channel is found.
Push “−” side to decrease the volume.
The volume continues to decrease while
the switch is being pushed.
Some parts of the audio system can be
adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel.
Details of the specific switches, controls,
and features are described below.
1. Volume control switch
2. “” switch
3. “MODE” switch
∗:
Use of satellite radio requires XM
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
2. “ ” switch
Cassette player
Radio
This switch has the following features—
This switch has the following features—
To skip up or down to a different track in
either direction:
Quickly push and release the “” or “”
side of the switch.
To select a preset station:
Quickly push and release the “” or “”
side of the switch. Do this again to select
the next preset station.
To seek a station:
Push and hold the “” or “” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Do this
again to find the next station. If you push
the switch on either side during the seek
mode, seeking will be cancelled.
To step up or down the frequency, push
and hold the switch even after you hear
a beep. When you release the switch, the
radio will begin seeking up or down for a
station. Do this again to find the next
station.
You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).
A blank space of at least 3 seconds is
considered to be a start of a recording.
When the beginning of a tape is reached,
the player automatically resumes play.
When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.
In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken word, live, or classical
recordings.
221
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio system operating hints
To fast−forward or reverse:
Push and hold the “” side of the switch
to fast−forward a cassette tape. “FF” will
appear on the display. Push and hold the
“” side of the switch to rewind a tape.
“REW” will appear on the display.
To stop the tape while it is fast−forwarding, push the “” side of the switch. To
stop the tape while it is rewinding, push
the “” side of the switch.
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast−forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto−reverse feature.
3. “MODE” switch
Push “MODE” switch to select an audio
mode. Each push changes the mode sequentially if the desired mode is ready to
use.
To turn the audio system on, push the
“MODE” switch.
To turn the audio system off, push and
hold the “MODE” switch until the system
turns off.
NOTICE
To ensure correct audio system operations:
Be careful not to spill beverages
over the audio system.
Do not put anything other than a
cassette tape or Compact Disc into
the slot.
The use of a cellular phone inside
or near the vehicle may cause a
noise from the speakers of the audio system which you are listening
to. However, this does not indicate
a malfunction.
Compact disc player
Use this switch to skip up or down to a
different track in either direction.
RADIO RECEPTION
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
your radio—it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
Quickly push and release the “” or “”
side of the switch until the track you want
to listen to is set. If you want to return
to the beginning of the current track, push
the “” side of the switch once, quickly.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain
can interfere with FM reception. Power
lines or telephone wires can interfere with
AM signals. The farther you are from a
station, the weaker its signal will be. In
addition,
reception conditions change
constantly as your vehicle moves.
With compact disc changer only—
Push and hold the “” or “” side of the
switch until the disc you want to listen to
is set.
222
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Here are some common reception problems that you may experience.
FM
Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 40 km (25
miles). Once outside this range, you may
notice fading and drifting, which increase
with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,
making it possible for two signals to reach
your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or
loss of reception.
Static and fluttering—These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping—If the FM signal you
are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may
tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.
AM
NOTICE
Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere−especially at night.
These reflected signals can interfere with
those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound
alternately strong and weak.
Station interference—When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a
radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static—AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static.
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation.
XM∗
Alternation or modifications carried out
without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s right to operate the
equipment.
∗:
Use of satellite radio requires XM
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
223
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
—Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
—Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
—Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
—Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER
AND TAPES
For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:
Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.
A dirty tape head or tape path can
decrease sound quality and tangle your
cassette tapes. The easiest way to
clean them is by using a cleaning tape.
(A wet type is recommended.)
Use high−quality cassettes.
Low−quality cassette tapes can cause
many problems, including poor sound,
inconsistent
playing
speed,
and
constant auto−reversing. They can also
get stuck or tangled in the cassette
player.
Do not use a cassette if it has been
damaged or tangled or if its label is
peeling off.
Do not leave a cassette in the player
if you are not listening to it, especially
if it is hot outside.
Store cassettes in their cases and out
of direct sunlight.
224
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than 100 minutes (50
minutes per side). The tape used in
these cassettes is thin and could get
stuck or tangled in the cassette player.
CARING FOR YOUR
PLAYER AND DISCS
COMPACT
DISC
Your compact disc player is intended
for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.
Extremely high temperatures can keep
your compact disc player from working.
On hot days, use the air conditioning
to cool the vehicle interior before you
listen to a disc.
Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make your compact disc player skip.
If moisture gets into your compact disc
player, you may not hear any sound
even though your compact disc player
appears to be working. Remove the
disc from the player and wait until it
dries.
CAUTION
Compact disc players use an invisible
laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed
outside the unit. Be sure to operate
the player correctly.
Use only compact discs marked as
Special shaped discs
shown above. The following products
may not be playable on your compact
disc player.
Copy−protected CD
CD−R (CD−Recordable)
CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)
CD−ROM
Transparent/translucent discs
225
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTICE
Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in
the illustrations. The use of such
discs may damage the player or
changer, or it may be impossible to
eject the disc.
This system is not designed for use
of Dual Disc. Do not use Dual Disc
because it may cause damage to
the player or changer.
Low quality discs
Correct
Wrong
Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you are inserting them.
Hold them on the edge and do not
bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints
on them, particularly on the shiny side.
Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or
other disc damage could cause the
player to skip or to repeat a section of
a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the
disc up to the light.)
Remove discs from the compact disc
player when you are not listening to
them. Store them in their plastic cases
away from moisture, heat, and direct
sunlight.
Labeled discs
226
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a
soft, lint−free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line
from the center to the edge of the disc
(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,
lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventional
record cleaner or anti−static device.
227
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
228
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
1− 9
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel and rear vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
234
234
237
238
239
229
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Controls
1. Air conditioning display (without
navigation system)
2. Air conditioning display (For the
navigation system, see the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual.”)
3. Windshield air flow button
4. Temperature selector (“TEMP”)
(with “DUAL” button indicator
on—individual setting on driver side
only)
(with “DUAL” button indicator
off—simultaneous setting on driver,
front passenger)
5. “AUTO” button
6. Temperature selector (“PASSENGER
TEMP”)
(individual setting on front passenger
side only)
7. “OFF” button
8. “A/C” button
9. Air intake selector
10. “MODE” button (air flow selector)
11. Fan speed selector
12. “DUAL” button (temperature setting
mode change)
230
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
“AUTO” button
“DUAL” button
—“PASSENGER TEMP” button
For automatic operation of the air conditioning, press the “AUTO” button. “AUTO”
will appear on the display to show that
the automatic operation mode has been
selected.
Push the button to change the mode of
the temperature setting.
This button changes the temperature on
the front passenger side only.
With the indicator on—Individual temperature setting for driver and front passenger
With the indicator off—Simultaneous
temperature setting for driver and front
passenger
“OFF” button
In the automatic operation mode, the air
conditioning selects the most suitable fan
speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of
the air conditioning according to the temperature.
When you press the “AUTO” button with
the air intake mode at FRESH, internal
circulation may be applied for maximum
cooling.
You may use manual controls if you want
to select your own settings.
Fan speed selector
Push the “” (increase) or “” (decrease)
side of the button to adjust the fan speed.
In automatic operation, you do not have
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire
another fan speed mode.
Push the “OFF” button to turn off the air
conditioning system.
Temperature selectors
To increase the temperature, press the
“” side. To decrease it, press the “”
side.
“LO” appears when you adjust to maximum cooling, and “HI” appears when you
adjust to maximum warming.
—“TEMP” button
With the “DUAL” button indicator on—This
button changes the temperature on the
driver side only.
With the “DUAL” button indicator off—This
button changes the temperature on the
driver side and front passenger side simultaneously.
This function will be cancelled when the
“PASSENGER TEMP” button is pushed.
231
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the
instrument panel vents and the rear
vents.
2. Bi−level—Air flows from the floor
vents, the instrument panel vents and
the rear vents.
When you set the temperature selector
setting at about the middle in automatic
operation, warm air flows out of the
floor vents and relatively low−temperature air flows out of the center and
side vents.
“MODE” button (air flow selector)
Push the “MODE” button to select the
vents used for air flow.
In automatic operation, you do not have
to select the air flow unless you desire
another air flow mode.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.
4. Floor/Windshield—Air
flows
mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.
This position allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to
RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake selector button once again.
For details about air flow selector settings,
see “Air flow selector settings” described
below.
232
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Windshield air flow button
When this button is pressed, air flows
mainly from the windshield vents and
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
Pressing this button once again returns
the air flow mode to the last one used.
In this position, the air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically to
clean up the front view quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.
For details about air flow selector settings,
see “Air flow selector settings” described
below.
“A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, press the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.
If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer for service.
Air intake selector
Press the button to select the air source.
The air intake mode which is being selected is shown on the display.
1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside
the vehicle.
2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the system.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.
For example, when the ambient temperature is low, the air intake mode may
change automatically to FRESH. This is
not a malfunction.
233
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Air flow selector settings
Operating tips
To cool off your Toyota after it has
been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes.
This vents the hot air, allowing the air
conditioning to cool the interior more
quickly.
Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).
On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside
of the windshield.
Keep the area under the front seats
clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.
On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.
When driving on dusty roads, close all
windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake selector be set to
FRESH and the fan speed selector to
any setting except off.
234
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If following another vehicle on a dusty
road, or driving in windy and dusty
conditions, it is recommended that the
air intake selector be temporarily set to
RECIRCULATE, which will close off the
outside passage and prevent outside
air and dust from entering the vehicle
interior.
Heating
Air conditioning
For best results, set controls to:
For best results, set controls to:
—For automatic operation
—For automatic operation
Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired
temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF
—For manual operation
Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired
temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—ON
—For manual operation
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—FLOOR
Air conditioning—OFF
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards low temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—ON
For quick heating, select recirculated
For quick cooling, select recirculated
air for a few minutes. To keep the
windows from fogging, select fresh after the vehicle interior has been
warmed.
air for a few minutes.
Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidified heating.
Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.
235
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Ventilation
Defogging and defrosting
For best results, set controls to:
—The inside of the windshield
—For automatic operation
For best results, set controls to:
Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—Towards low temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF
—For manual operation
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards low temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF
—For automatic operation
Temperature—Towards high temperature
to heat; low temperature
to cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
—For manual operation
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards high temperature
to heat; low temperature
to cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
Pressing this button once again returns
the air flow mode to the last one used.
In this position, the air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically to
clean up the front view quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.
236
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield—the difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse.
—The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
—For automatic operation
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
—For manual operation
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defrosting function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
Pressing this button once again returns
the air flow mode to the last one used.
Climate remote controls
(steering switches)
“AUTO” button
In this position, the air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically to
clean up the front view quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.
For automatic operation of the air conditioning, press the “AUTO” button. “AUTO”
will appear on the display to show that
the automatic operation mode has been
selected.
To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting
the
windshield,
floor/windshield air flow.
choose
In the automatic operation mode, the air
conditioning selects the most suitable fan
speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of
the air conditioning according to the temperature.
Some parts of the air conditioning system
can be adjusted using the switches on the
steering wheel.
Details of the specific switches, controls,
and features are described below.
1. Temperature selector (“TEMP”)
(with “DUAL” button indicator
on—individual setting on driver side
only)
(with “DUAL” button indicator
off—simultaneous setting on driver,
front passenger)
2. “AUTO” button
3. “OFF” button
When you press the “AUTO” button with
the air intake mode at FRESH, internal
circulation may be applied for maximum
cooling.
You may use manual controls if you want
to select your own settings.
Temperature selector
To increase the temperature, press the
“” side. To decrease it, press the “”
side.
“LO” appears when you adjust to maximum cooling, and “HI” appears when you
adjust to maximum warming.
With the “DUAL” button indicator on—This
button changes the temperature on the
driver side only.
237
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument panel and rear
vents
With the “DUAL” button indicator off—This
button changes the temperature on the
driver side and front passenger side simultaneously.
This function will be cancelled when the
“PASSENGER TEMP” button on the instrument panel is pushed.
“OFF” button
Push the “OFF” button to turn off the air
conditioning system.
Side vents
Rear vents
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the instrument panel vents and rear vents.
The instrument panel vents and rear vents
may be opened or closed as shown.
Center vents
238
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Checking and replacing the
air conditioning filter
Air conditioning filter—
The air conditioning filter may clog after long use. The filter may need to be
cleaned or replaced if the air flow of
the air conditioner and heater experiences extreme reductions in operating
efficiency, or if the windows begin to
fog up easily.
The air conditioning filter information
label is placed as shown and indicates
that a filter has been installed.
The air conditioning filter prevents dust
from entering the vehicle through the air
conditioning vent.
This air conditioning system has a high
efficient air refiner filter which helps
eliminate dust and pollen, thereby increasing your driving comfort.
To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,
cleaning and replace the air conditioning
filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy
traffic flow, such as inner city or desert
areas, early replacement may be required.
(For scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
The air conditioning filter is set behind
the glove box.
239
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
REMOVAL METHOD:
1. Open the glove box. Remove the
screw with a Phillips−head screwdriver and slide off the damper as
shown.
2. Push in each side of the glove box
to disconnect the claws.
240
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Remove the filter cover while pushing in both ends of the cover.
4. Pull the filter out of the filter outlet.
CLEANING METHOD:
If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing
compressed air through the filter from
the downward side.
Hold the air gun 5 cm (2 in.) from the
filter and blow for approximately 2 minutes
at 500 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2 or bar, 72 psi).
If it is not available, have the
cleaned by your Toyota dealer.
filter
NOTICE
When cleaning the filter, do not clean
the filter with water.
REPLACEMENT METHOD:
When inserting the filter in the filter
outlet, keep the “↑ UP” mark pointing
up.
INFORMATION
The air filter should be installed properly in position. The use of air conditioning with the air filter removed
may cause deteriorated dustproof performance and then affect air conditioning performance.
241
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
242
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
1− 10
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Other equipment
Center display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter and ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear electric sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grocery bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
244
247
247
252
253
254
257
258
259
260
261
262
262
263
263
243
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Center display—
1. Audio display
(For details, see “Audio system” on
page 195 in Section 1−8.)
2. Air conditioning display
(For details, see “Air conditioning
system” on page 229 in Section 1−9.)
3. Pattern selector knob
4. Cruise information display
5. Outside temperature display
244
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Before using the center
display
Operate the center
ignition switch on.
display with
the
Pattern selector knob
This knob is used to select the pattern
of the display.
When the ignition switch is set at ON, the
last previously used mode displayed just
before the ignition switch is turned off will
appear.
Every time you push the pattern selector
knob, the display illuminates in the following order.
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the center display, the
display will automatically be set to the
initial mode.
1. All the display
When the instrument panel lights are
turned on, the brightness of the display
may be reduced.
3. Display off
2. Audio display and air conditioning display
CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
245
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Outside temperature display
—Cruise information display
The actual driving range varies with driving habits and road conditions. If fuel consumption is good, the driving range will be
longer than indicated. If fuel consumption
is poor, the driving range will be shorter
than indicated.
2. Elapsed time
(“TRIP TIME”)
The elapsed time after the engine starts
is displayed.
The outside temperature value is updated
every 1 second.
1. Driving range
(“FUEL RANGE”)
The displayed temperature ranges from
−30C (−22F) up to 50C (122F).
The distance the vehicle can travel with
the remaining fuel is calculated and
displayed based on the quantity of remaining fuel and past fuel consumption.
If an abnormality exists in the connection
of the outside air temperature sensor,
“−−”, “F” or “E” will appear on the display.
If “−−”, “F” or “E” appears on the display,
contact your Toyota dealer.
There may be a case that “−−”, “F” or “E”
appears momentarily when the ignition
switch is quickly set to ON. It is normal
if it goes out soon.
The displayed value is updated every 10
seconds.
Every time you refuel the vehicle, the
driving range calculation is automatically
reset.
When the engine is started, driving time
is counted from 0:00. Up to 99:59 (99
hours, 59 minutes) can be displayed.
When the driving time exceeds 99:59, the
counter returns to 0:00.
The calculation is reset when the ignition
switch is turned off.
3. Average fuel consumption after refueling
(“AVERAGE”)
Average fuel consumption after refueling is calculated and displayed based
on total driving distance and total fuel
consumption with the engine running.
The displayed value is updated every 10
seconds.
Every time you refuel the vehicle, the average fuel consumption after refueling calculation is automatically reset.
246
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Clock
Compass
When the instrument panel lights are
turned on, the brightness of the time indication may be reduced.
To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.
To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.
The direction is indicated on the inside
rear view mirror.
If quick adjustment to a full hour is desired, push the “:00” button.
If the ignition switch was turned off with
the system on, the system will automatically turn back on when the ignition switch
is turned on.
For example, if the “:00” button is depressed when the time is between
1:01—1:29, the time will change to 1:00.
If the time is between 1:30—1:59, the
time will change to 2:00.
Push the “
” switch to turn the compass system on and off.
The ignition switch must be set at ON.
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00 (one
o’clock).
247
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The compass indicates the direction
that the vehicle is heading. In the
above case, it shows that the vehicle is
heading north.
Displays
Directions
N
NE
E
SE
S
SW
W
NW
North
Northeast
East
Southeast
South
Southwest
West
Northwest
The compass may not show the correct
direction in the following conditions:
The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
The compass does not adjust while the
vehicle is stopped.
The vehicle is in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).
The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a
magnet or a metal object on or near
the inside rear view mirror.)
The battery has been disconnected.
If your vehicle is out of the set zone,
refer to “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS”
below to set the zone number.
If the deviation is small, the compass
works to calibrate the direction automatically while the vehicle is in motion.
For additional precision or for complete
calibrating,
see
“CALIBRATING
THE
COMPASS” below.
The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning.
The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
248
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The compass sensor is in the inside
rear view mirror.
NOTICE
Do not put magnets or a metal object
on or near the inside rear view mirror
of the vehicle. Doing this may cause
malfunction of the compass sensor.
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation
calibration)
The direction display on the compass
deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The
angle of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,
then push and hold the “
” switch until
the zone number appears on the display.
Then push the “
” switch, referring to
the following map to select the number of
the zone where the vehicle is.
249
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Samoa:
5
Guam:
8
Saipan:
8
After calibration, leaving the system for
several seconds returns it to the compass
mode.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Zone number
250
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Perform circling calibration just after
you have purchased your Toyota. And
then always perform circling calibration
after the battery has been removed, replaced or disconnected.
Do not perform circling calibration of
the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling
calibration)
Sometimes the direction display on the
compass may not change after a turn. To
rectify this, stop the vehicle and push and
hold the “
” switch until “C” appears on
the display.
If “C” appears on the display because of
a drastic change in the magnetic field,
perform circling calibration.
Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5
mph) or less. If there is not enough space
to drive in a circle, drive around the
block.
During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with
the calibration.
After driving 1 to 3 circles in the above
method, calibration is completed when the
direction is shown on the display.
If calibration cannot be performed because
of the magnetized vehicle etc., take your
vehicle to Toyota dealer.
251
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cigarette lighter and ashtrays
CIGARETTE LIGHTER (type A)
CAUTION
To use the cigarette lighter, first open
the ashtray lid, then press in the lighter. After it finishes heating up, it automatically pops out ready for use.
When doing the circling calibration,
be sure to secure a wide space,
and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not
violate any local traffic rules while
performing circling calibration.
If the engine is not running, the ignition
switch must be set at ACC.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
in.
Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter or
equivalent for replacement.
ASHTRAY
Type A
Type A: To use the ashtray, push the lid
to open.
Type B: Open the lid of the cup holder
and set the ashtray in it. It can be used
outside the vehicle. To use the ashtray,
raise the lid.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching
fire. After using the ashtray, close the lid
completely.
To detach the ashtray, pull it out.
Type B
252
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Power outlets
The power outlets are designed
power supply for car accessories.
CAUTION
for
The ignition switch must be set at ACC
or ON for the power outlet to be used.
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, always completely close
the ashtray after use.
NOTICE
To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the electricity
over the total vehicle capacity of 12
V/120W.
Rear console box
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlet longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
Close the power outlet lids when
the power outlets are not in use.
Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug that fits the outlet,
or allowing any liquid to get into
the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.
Center auxiliary box
253
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Garage door opener
(a) Programming the HomeLink
Indicator light
The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3
buttons and you can store one program
for each button.
HomeLink
To ensure correct programming into the
HomeLink, install a new battery in the
hand−held transmitter prior to programming.
Buttons
The garage door opener (
Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink and can
be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks,
home lighting systems, and security
systems, etc.
The battery side of the hand−held transmitter must be pointed away from the
HomeLink during the programming process.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure
in “Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian
market”.
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons
you want to program.
254
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
25 to
75 mm
(1 to 3 in.)
Hand−held
garage
transmitter
2. Place your hand−held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from
the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink
in view while programming.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another device.
Programming a rolling code system
If your device is “Rolling Code”
equipped, it is necessary to follow
steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLink” before
proceeding with the steps listed below.
3. Simultaneously press and hold the
hand−held garage transmitter button
along with the selected HomeLink button.
Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
4. When the indicator light on the
HomeLink changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.
5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by
pressing the newly programmed button.
If programming a garage door opener,
check to see if the garage door opens
and closes.
If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage transmitter is of the
“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if
the indicator light (on the HomeLink)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after
2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is
the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
The exact location and color of the
button may vary by brand of garage
door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door
opener manufacturer for the location of
this “training” button.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds
in which to initiate step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button twice. The
garage door may open. If the door
does open, the programming process is
complete. If the door does not open,
press and release the button a third
time. This third press and release will
complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.
255
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The ceiling mounted garage door opener
motor
should
now
recognize
the
HomeLink unit and be able activate the
garage door up/down.
6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by
pressing the newly programmed button.
Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another rolling code system.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another device.
Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian market
Programming other devices
1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program.
2. Place
your
hand−held gate/device
transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)
away
from
the
surface
of
the
HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink
in view while programming.
3. Press
and
hold
HomeLink button.
the
selected
4. Continuously press and release (cycle)
the hand−held gate/device transmitter
button every 2 seconds until step 5 is
complete.
5. When the indicator light on the
HomeLink changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.
To program other devices such as home
security systems, home door locks or
lighting, contact your authorized Toyota
dealer for assistance.
Reprogramming a button
Individual HomeLink
buttons cannot be
erased, however, to reprogram a single
button, follow the procedure “Programming
the HomeLink”.
(b) Operating the HomeLink
To operate the HomeLink, press the
appropriate HomeLink button to activate
the programmed device. The HomeLink
indicator light should come on. The
HomeLink continues to send the signal
for up to 20 seconds as long as the
button is pressed.
(c) Erasing
the
entire
HomeLink
memory (all three programs)
To erase all previously programmed codes
at one time, press and hold down the 2
outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
the programs stored in the HomeLink
memory.
For additional programming assistance
with
your
HomeLink
Universal
Transceiver call the:
Toyota Customer Experience Center at
1−800−331−4331 (U.S.A.)
Toyota Canada Customer Interaction
Centre at 1−888−869−6828 (Canada)
256
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Glove box
HomeLink
Refer to
on the internet at:
WWW.HOMELINK.COM
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink
Universal Transceiver, you may be
operating a garage door or other
device. Make sure people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.
Do not use this HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage
door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards.
(This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object
(signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these features
increases risk of serious injury or
death.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference that may be received, including
interference that may cause undersired
operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been
tested and complies with FCC and IC
rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
device.
To use the glove box:
Open by pulling the lever.
Lock by inserting the master key (vehicles
with key cylinder−type ignition switch) or
mechanical key (vehicles with smart key
system) and turning it clockwise.
Unlock by inserting the master key (vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch) or mechanical key (vehicles with
smart key system) and turning it counterclockwise.
With the instrument panel lights on, the
glove box light will come on when the
glove box is open.
257
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Auxiliary boxes
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.
To use the auxiliary boxes, open the
lids as shown in the following illustrations.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop,
always keep the auxiliary box
closed while driving.
Type A—It is designed for holding
a light objects, do not place any
heavy objects in it. Heavy objects
may cause the holder to open and
contents to fly out resulting in injuries.
Type A (ceiling)
NOTICE
Type A—During hot weather, the interior of the vehicle becomes very hot.
Do not leave anything flammable or
deformable such as a lighter, glasses,
etc. inside.
Type B (front console)
258
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear console box
Type C (door panel)
Type E (rear seat)
To access the rear console box, pull up
the lock release lever while raising the
rear console box lid.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the console box closed
while driving.
Type D (center console)
259
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cup holders
It is possible to use the rear console
box lid as an armrest by moving it as
shown in the illustration.
Type A (center console)
When using the console box, return the lid
to its original position.
Type B (rear armrest)
260
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Type C (rear armrest)
Rear electric sunshade
The cup holders are designed for holding cups or drink−cans securely.
CAUTION
To use the cup holder, do the following.
Do not touch the brackets fastening
Type A—Push on the lid.
the sunshade to avoid injuring your
fingers or hands.
Type B—Pull down the rear armrest.
Do not put your fingers in the sun-
Type C—Pull down the rear armrest and
open the lid on the armrest.
shade groove while the sunshade is
operating to avoid getting them
caught or injured by the runner.
CAUTION
Do not place anything else other
than cups or drink−cans on the cup
holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment
and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or in
an accident.
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, keep the cup holder
closed when it is not in use.
To raise the rear electric sunshade,
push the switch. To lower the sunshade, push the switch again.
The sunshade works when the ignition
switch is set at ON.
When the selector lever is shifted into
the “R” position while the sunshade is
raised, the sunshade will be automatically lowered. To raise the sunshade,
move the selector lever out of “R”
position and push the switch.
261
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Storage box
Grocery bag hooks
This box is designed to hold things like
bottles.
This hook is designed to hang things
like grocery bags.
NOTICE
To prevent the vehicle battery from
being discharged, always operate
the sunshade while the engine is
running.
Observe the following to avoid damage and/or malfunction:
Do not overload the sunshade motor and other parts (for instance by
pushing down on the sunshade
bracket while it is opening).
Do not place anything where they
may hinder the opening/closing of
the sunshade.
Do not affix anything to the sunshade.
NOTICE
Clean the sunshade groove if there
is any foreign matter or dust on it.
To prevent damage to the hook, avoid
hanging heavy loads on it.
Do not operate the rear electric
sunshade repeatedly for a long time
as its motor may overheat.
262
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cargo net
Floor mat
To secure belongings, hang the cargo
net on the hooks.
Use a floor mat of the correct size.
NOTICE
Do not use the net to secure sharp
or heavy objects. The net will tear
off.
If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have
2 holes, then they are designed for use
with 2 locking clips. Attach the floor mat
to the vehicle carpet using the clips. Lock
the clips into the holes in the vehicle
carpet.
CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly
placed on the vehicle carpet. If the
floor mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident.
Be sure not to twist the net when
hooking.
263
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
264
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
2
INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR
TOYOTA
Information before driving your toyota
Break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three−way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Iridium−tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Toyota’s identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
266
266
268
268
269
270
270
272
272
276
277
278
278
279
289
290
292
265
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Break−in period
Fuel
Drive gently and avoid high speeds.
FUEL TYPE
OCTANE RATING
Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break−in. But following a few simple tips
for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add
to the future economy and long life of
your vehicle:
Your new vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
To help prevent gas station mix−ups, your
Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.
The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will
not.
Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating or research octane number lower
than stated above will cause persistent
heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will
lead to engine damage.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use
should meet specifications of ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93
in Canada.
If you detect heavy knocking even when
using the recommended fuel, or if you
hear steady knocking while holding a
steady speed on level roads, consult your
Toyota dealer.
Avoid full throttle acceleration when
starting and driving.
Avoid racing the engine.
Try to avoid hard stops during the first
300 km (200 miles).
Do not drive for a long time at any
single speed, either fast or slow.
NOTICE
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of
leaded gasoline will cause the three−
way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control
system to function improperly. Also,
this can increase maintenance costs.
266
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If your engine knocks...
However, occasionally, you may notice
light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.
GASOLINE
ADDITIVES
CONTAINING
DETERGENT
Toyota recommends the use of gasoline
that contains detergent additives to
avoid build−up of engine deposits.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.
contains detergent additives to keep clean
and/or clean intake systems.
QUALITY GASOLINE
Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,
Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for quality fuel named
World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that
is expected to be applied world wide.
The WWFC consists of four categories
that depend on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been
adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emissions in
vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction
through better vehicle performance.
CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE
GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE is
available in many areas.
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner
burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.
OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE
Toyota allows the use of oxygenate
blended gasoline where the oxygenate
content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your
Toyota, be sure that it has an octane
rating no lower than 87.
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing methanol.
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
GASOLINE QUALITY
In a very few cases, you may experience
driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability,
try changing gasoline brands. If this does
not rectify your problem, then consult your
Toyota dealer.
267
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTICE
Do not use gasohol other than
stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
If driveability problems are encountered (poor hot starting, vaporizing,
engine knock, etc.), discontinue the
use.
Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling. Gasohol may cause
paint damage.
FUEL TANK CAPACITY
Fuel pump shut off system
Operation in foreign countries
The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine to minimize the
risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls
or an airbag inflates upon collision. To
restart the engine after the fuel pump shut
off system activates, set the ignition
switch to ACC or off once and start it.
If you plan to drive your Toyota in
another country...
CAUTION
Inspect the ground under the vehicle
before restarting the engine. If you
find that fuel has leaked onto the
ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. In
this case, do not restart the engine.
70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 Imp. gal.)
268
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
First, comply with the vehicle registration
laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane
number).
Three−way catalytic converters
NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases
flowing into the three−way catalytic
converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent
this and other damage, observe the
following precautions:
Use only unleaded gasoline.
The three−way catalytic converters are
emission control devices installed in
the exhaust system.
The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the
exhaust gas.
Do not drive with an extremely low
fuel level; running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three−
way catalytic converter.
Do not allow the engine to run at
idle speed for more than 20 minutes.
Avoid racing the engine.
CAUTION
Do not push−start or pull−start your
vehicle.
Keep people and combustible mate-
Do not turn off the ignition while
the vehicle is moving.
rials away from the exhaust pipe
while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.
Keep your engine in good running
order. Malfunctions in the engine
electrical system, electronic ignition
system/distributor ignition system
or fuel system could cause an extremely high three−way catalytic
converter temperature.
If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, take your
vehicle in for a check−up as soon
as possible. Remember, your Toyota
dealer knows your vehicle and its
three−way catalytic converter system best.
To ensure that the three−way catalytic converter and the entire emission control system operate properly, your vehicle must receive the
periodic inspections required by the
Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information,
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything that might burn
easily such as grass, leaves, paper
or rags.
269
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Facts about engine oil
consumption
Engine exhaust cautions
CAUTION
Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.
It contains carbon monoxide, which
is a colorless and odorless gas. It
can cause unconsciousness or even
death.
Make sure the exhaust system has
no holes or loose connections. The
system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something,
or notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust, have the system
checked immediately.
Do not run the engine in a garage
or enclosed area except for the
time needed to drive the vehicle in
or out. The exhaust gases cannot
escape, making this a particularly
dangerous situation.
Keep the trunk lid closed while
driving. An open or unsealed trunk
lid may cause exhaust gases to be
drawn into the vehicle.
To allow proper operation of your
vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
the inlet grilles in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes in the
vehicle, open the windows and
close the trunk lid to ensure plenty
of fresh air enters the vehicle. If
you can smell exhaust fumes even
though there are no other vehicles
in the surrounding area, have your
vehicle checked by your Toyota
dealer. Continued inhalation of exhaust fumes can lead to death by
gas poisoning.
Do not remain for a long time in a
parked vehicle with the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however,
do so only in an unconfined area
and adjust the heating or cooling
system to force outside air into the
vehicle.
270
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL
Engine oil has the primary functions of
lubricating and cooling the inside of the
engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order.
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal
engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as
follows.
Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston
rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil
is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder.
High negative pressure generated when
the vehicle is decelerating sucks some
of this oil into the combustion chamber.
This oil as well as some part of the oil
film left on the cylinder wall is burned
by the high temperature combustion
gases during the combustion process.
Oil is also used to lubricate the stems
of the intake valves. Some of this oil
is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is
burned along with the fuel. High temperature exhaust gases also burn the
oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve
stems.
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the
quality of the oil and the conditions the
vehicle is driven under.
More oil is consumed by high−speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since
its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls
have not become conditioned.
Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000
km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600
miles)
When judging the amount of oil consumption, note the that oil may become
diluted and make it difficult to judge
the true level accurately.
As an example, if a vehicle is used for
repeated short trips, and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This
is because the oil is gradually becoming
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
appear that the oil level has not changed.
For detailed information on oil level check,
see “Checking the engine oil level” on
page 356 in Section 7−2.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out
when the vehicle is then driven at high
speeds, as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after driving at high speeds.
IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHECK
One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil
function will not be impaired. Therefore, it
is essential that the oil level be checked
regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil
level be checked every time you refuel
the vehicle.
NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble
due to insufficient oil.
271
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Iridium−tipped spark plugs
Brake system
The tandem master cylinder brake system
is a hydraulic system with two separate
sub−systems. If either sub−system should
fail, the other will still work. However, the
pedal will be harder to press, and your
stopping distance will increase. Also, the
brake system warning light may come on.
CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a
single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped
spark plugs.
NOTICE
Use only Toyota genuine iridium−
tipped spark plugs and do not adjust
gaps for your engine performance and
smooth driveability.
BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster uses engine vacuum to
power−assist the brakes. If the engine
should quit while you are driving, you can
bring the vehicle to a stop with normal
pedal pressure. There is enough reserved
vacuum for one or two stops—but no
more!
For details about the spark plug type, see
“Service specifications” on page 383 in
Section 8.
272
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
Do not pump the brake pedal if the
engine stalls. Each push on the
pedal uses up your reserved vacuum.
Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes will still
work. But you will have to push the
pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will
increase.
ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The anti−lock brake system is designed
to automatically help prevent lock−up of
the wheels during a sudden braking or
braking on slippery road surfaces. This
assists in providing directional stability
and steering performance of the vehicle
under these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake
pedal: When the anti−lock brake system
function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.
In this situation, to let the anti−lock
brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not
pump the brake in a panic stop. This
will result in reduced braking performance.
The anti−lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated
to a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
You may hear a click or motor sound in
the engine compartment for a few seconds
when the engine is started or just after
the vehicle is started. This means that the
anti−lock brake system is in the self
check mode, and does not indicate a malfunction.
When the anti−lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may
occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system:
You may hear the anti−lock brake system operating and feel the brake pedal
pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You
may also hear the motor sound in the
engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped.
At the end of the anti−lock brake sys-
CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti−lock
brake system: Although the anti−lock
brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to
drive with all due care and maintain
a moderate speed and safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle
stability and effectiveness of steering
wheel operation even with the anti−
lock brake system on.
If tire grip performance exceeds its
capability, or if hydroplaning occurs
during high speed driving in the rain,
the anti−lock brake system does not
provide vehicle control.
tem activation, the brake pedal may
move a little forward.
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery
road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site,
joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day
tends to activate the anti−lock brake system.
273
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
“ABS” warning light
Anti−lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate
speed and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Compared with vehicles without an
anti−lock brake system, your vehicle
may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:
Vehicles without the vehicle stability
control system—
The light comes on when the ignition
switch is set at ON. If the anti−lock brake
system works properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the
system malfunctions, the light comes on
again.
Driving on rough, gravel or snow−
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate,
but the brake system still operates conventionally.
covered roads.
Driving with tire chains installed.
Driving over the steps such as the
Type A
joints on the road.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.
Driving on roads where the road
surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at
appropriate pressure: The anti−lock
brake system detects vehicle speeds
using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speeds. The use
of tires other than specified may fail
to detect the accurate turning speed
resulting in a longer stopping distance.
Type B
274
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If either of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON, or remains
on.
The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
Vehicles with the vehicle stability control system—
The light comes on when the ignition
switch is set at ON. If the anti−lock brake
system and the brake assist system work
properly, the light turns off after a few
seconds. Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on
again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system and the brake assist system do not operate, but the brake
system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON, or remains
on.
The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
275
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Brake pad wear limit
indicators
DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE
SYSTEM
BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (vehicles with
vehicle stability control system)
Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type
parking brake system. This type of brake
system needs bedding−down of the brake
shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.
When you slam the brakes on, the
brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful
braking for a driver who cannot hold
down the brake pedal firmly.
Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding−down.
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time,
you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment and feel the vibration of the
brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction.
The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to
a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 145 in Section 1−6.
276
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The brake pad wear limit indicators on
your disc brakes give a warning noise
when the brake pads are worn to where
replacement is required.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise
while driving, have the brake pads
checked and replaced by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not
replaced when necessary.
Your Toyota’s identification—
—Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number (VIN)
is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
This number is on the left top of the
instrument panel, and can be seen
through the windshield from outside.
—Engine number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
also on the Certification Label.
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown.
This is the primary identification number
for your Toyota. It is used in registering
the ownership of your vehicle.
277
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Theft prevention labels
(except for Canada)
Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 47
mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce
the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from
stolen vehicles. The label is designed so
that once it is applied to a surface, any
attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring
these labels intact from one part to another, will be impossible.
Suspension and chassis
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension/chassis
with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It
can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.
NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the
theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.
278
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire information—
—Tire symbols (standard tire)
This illustration indicates typical tire
symbols.
1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire
size” on page 283.
2. DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)—For details, see
“—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)” on page 282.
3. Location of the tread wear indicators—For details, see “Checking and replacing tires” on page
363.
4. Uniform tire quality grading—
For details, see “—Uniform tire
quality grading” on page 284.
5. Tire ply composition and materials—Plies mean a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords. Cords
mean the strands forming the plies
in the tire.
6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A
radial tire has “RADIAL” on the
sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.
279
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7. “TUBELESS”
or
“TUBE
TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not
have a tube inside the tire and air
is directly filled in the tire. A tube
type tire has a tube inside the tire
and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
8. Load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure—For details,
see “Vehicle load limits” on page
289 and “Tires” on page 386.
9. Maximum cold tire inflation
pressure—This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For details about recommended
cold
tire
inflation
pressure, see “Tires” on page 386.
10.Summer tire or all season
tire—An all season tire has “M+S”
on the sidewall. The tire not
marked with “M+S” is a summer
tire. For details, see “Types of
tires” on page 292.
280
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Tire symbols (compact spare tire)
This illustration indicates typical tire
symbols.
1. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”—A
compact spare tire is identified by
the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded into its sidewall.
This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only. For details,
see “Compact spare tire” on page
321.
2. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire
size” on page 283.
3. DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)—For details, see
“—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)” on page 282.
4. Location of the tread wear indicators—For details, see “Checking and replacing tires” on page
363.
5. Load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure—For details,
see “Vehicle load limits” on page
289 and “Tires” on page 386.
281
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)
6. Maximum cold tire inflation
pressure—This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For details about recommended
cold
tire
inflation
pressure, see “Tires” on page 386.
7. Tire ply composition and materials—Plies mean a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords. Cords
mean the strands forming the plies
in the tire.
8. “TUBELESS”
or
“TUBE
TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not
have a tube inside the tire and air
is directly filled in the tire. A tube
type tire has a tube inside the tire
and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
9. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A
radial tire has “RADIAL” on the
sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.
The “DOT” symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
This illustration indicates typical DOT
and Tire Identification Number (TIN).
1. “DOT” symbol
2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3. Tire manufacturer’s identification
mark
4. Tire size code
5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type
code (3 or 4 letters)
6. Manufacturing week
7. Manufacturing year
282
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Tire size
This illustration indicates typical tire
size.
1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,
T=Temporary use)
2. Section width (in millimeters)
3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section
width)
4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,
D=Diagonal)
5. Wheel diameter (in inches)
6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one
letter)
—Name of each section of tire
1. Section width
2. Tire height
3. Wheel diameter
1. Bead
2. Sidewall
3. Shoulder
4. Tread
5. Belt
6. Inner liner
7. Reinforcing rubber
8. Carcass
9. Rim lines
10.Bead wires
11. Chafer
283
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared
in accordance with regulations issued
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides
the purchasers and/or prospective
purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you
read this information.
DOT quality grades—All passenger
vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality
grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear
200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear—The treadwear grade is
a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and a half (1−1/2) times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
284
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction
grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, and they represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and
does not include cornering (turning)
traction.
Temperature A, B, C—The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No.109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for
this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
285
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Meaning
Accessory weight
the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items
are available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)
Cold tire inflation pressure
tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile
under that condition
Curb weight
the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional engine
Intended outboard sidewall
(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Maximum inflation pressure
the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it
is shown on the sidewall of the tire
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
the
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
sum of—
curb weight;
accessory weight;
vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight
286
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire related term
Meaning
Normal occupant weight
68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that follows
Occupant distribution
distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table
1 that follows
Production options weight
the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing
over 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,
not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special
trim
Recommended inflation pressure
cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Rim
a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)
nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width
nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two
287
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire related term
Meaning
Vehicle normal load on the tire
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two
Weather side
the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity,
number of occupants
Vehicle normal load, number of
occupants
Occupant distribution in a normally
loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
288
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load
capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Follow the
load limits shown below. Total load capacity and seating capacity are also
described on the tire and loading information label. For location of the tire
and loading information label, see
“Checking tire inflation pressure” on
page 361.
Total load capacity:
395 kg (870 lb.)
Total load capacity means combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage. Tongue load is included when trailer towing.
Seating capacity:
Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 68 kg
(150 lb.) per person. Depending on
the weight of each person, the seating capacity given may exceed the
total load capacity.
NOTICE
Even if the number of occupants are
within the seating capacity, do not exceed the total load capacity.
Towing capacity:
454 kg (1000 lb.)
Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer
weight plus its cargo weight) that
your vehicle is able to tow.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the size (weight)
and the number of occupants. For details, see “—Capacity and distribution” that follows.
CAUTION
Do not apply the load more than
each load limit. That may cause
not only damage to the tires, but
also deterioration to the steering
ability and braking ability, which
may cause an accident.
289
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cargo and luggage—
—Stowage precautions
When stowing cargo and luggage in
the vehicle, observe the following:
Put cargo and luggage in the trunk
when at all possible. Be sure all
items are secured in place.
Be careful to keep the vehicle balanced. Locating the weight as far
forward as possible helps maintain
balance.
For better fuel economy, do not
carry unneeded weight.
—Capacity and distribution
Do not drive with objects left
on top of the instrument panel.
They may interfere with the
driver’s field of view. Or they
may move during sharp vehicle
acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s control of the
vehicle. In an accident they
may injure the vehicle occupants.
CAUTION
Do not place anything on the
package tray behind the rear
seatback. Such items may be
thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or an accident.
290
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is
650
lbs.
(1400–750
(5x150)=650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
For details about trailer towing, see
page 306.
Cargo
capacity
Total load
capacity
Example on Your Vehicle
In case that 2 people with the combined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) are
riding in your vehicle with the total
load capacity of 395 kg (870 lb.), the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
395 kg – 166 kg = 229 kg
(870 lb. – 366 lb. = 504 lb.)
291
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Types of tires
From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 176
kg (388 lb.) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced
as follows:
229 kg – 176 kg = 53 kg
(504 lb. – 388 lb. = 116 lb.)
As shown in the above example, if the
number of occupants increases, the
cargo and luggage load equaling the
combined weight of occupants who
got on later must be reduced. In other
words, if the increase in the number
of occupants causes the excess of
the total load capacity (combined
weight of occupants plus cargo and
luggage load), you have to reduce the
cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
For details about total load capacity,
see “Vehicle load limits” on page 289.
CAUTION
Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load
is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. That may cause not only damage to the tire but also deterioration to the steering ability due to
unbalance of the vehicle, causing
an accident.
292
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Determine what kind of tires your
vehicle is originally equipped with.
1. Summer tires
Summer tires are high−speed capability tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the
same traction performance as snow
tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow−covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow−covered or icy
roads, we recommend using snow
tires. If installing snow tires, be sure
to replace all four tires.
2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be
adequate for driving in most winter
conditions, as well as for use all year
round.
All season tires, however, do not have
adequate
traction
performance
compared with snow tires in heavy or
loose snow. Also, all season tires fall
short in acceleration and handling
performance compared with summer
tires in highway driving.
The details about how to distinguish
summer tires from all season tires are
described on page 279 in this Section.
CAUTION
Do not mix summer and all season tires on your vehicle as
this can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting
in loss of control.
Do not use tires other than the
manufacturer’s
designated
tires, and never mix tires or
wheels of the sizes different
from the originals.
293
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
294
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
3
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting and driving
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving and parking using smart key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
296
296
300
303
304
305
306
311
295
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Before starting the engine
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,
seat cushion angle, seat cushion
length, head restraint height, steering
wheel angle and length.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view
mirrors.
4. Lock all the doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.
How to start the engine—
—Cranking hold function
(a) Before cranking
With smart key system only—
1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
Once you press “ENGINE START STOP”
switch (engine switch) and release it, the
cranking hold function continues to crank
the engine until it starts.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
The function stops cranking the engine
after about 25 seconds maximum if the
engine has not started yet. When you
crank the engine again, wait a few seconds and restart it.
If you press and hold the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch, the function will
keep cranking for about 30 seconds maximum.
296
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you
need to restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in “N”. A starter safety device will
prevent the starter from operating if the
selector lever is in any drive position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to
the floor until driving off.
(b) Starting the engine
(with key cylinder−type
ignition switch)
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in “(a) Before cranking”.
Normal starting procedure
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your
engine automatically controls the proper
air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start
a cold or hot engine as follows:
(b) Starting the engine
(with smart key system)
NOTICE
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat
the starter and wiring systems.
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, have the
engine checked immediately.
With your foot off the accelerator pedal,
crank the engine by turning the key to
“START” position. Release it when the engine starts.
PUSH BUTTON START FUNCTION
Engine should be warmed up by driving,
not in idle. For warming up, drive with
smoothly turning engine until engine coolant temperature is within normal range.
The engine can be started by pressing the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in “(a) Before cranking”.
If the engine stalls...
Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal starting.
Normal starting procedure
If the engine will not start...
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your
engine automatically controls the proper
air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start
a cold or hot engine as follows:
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page
314 in Section 4.
297
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When the key is in the vehicle (on your
person), it is possible to start the engine.
When the push button start function
does not operate properly, the following
may be causes:
With the brake pedal firmly depressed, the
indicator light on the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch will turn green. Check that
the automatic transmission selector lever
is in the “P” position. Pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch once starts
the engine.
The key battery may be discharged if
the electronic key does not work.
You can start the engine by touching
the Toyota logo side of the electronic
key to the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch. For derails, see “Smart key
system” on page 27 in Section 1−2.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
slowly and firmly.
Engine should be warmed up by driving,
not in idle. For warming up, drive with
smoothly turning engine until engine coolant temperature is within normal range.
If the engine stalls...
Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal starting.
Replace the key battery as soon as
possible. (See “—Replacing battery” on
page 25 in Section 1−2.)
If the engine will not start...
In the following cases, the engine will not
start.
If a buzzer sounds from the vehicle
and the smart key system warning light
comes on when pressing the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch, this indicates
that the key is not in the vehicle.
If the key is placed in the trunk.
There are instances in which the engine will not start, even if the key is
in the vehicle (e.g. on the floor, in the
cup holder or glove box).
298
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The engine was repeatedly turned on
and off over a short period.
Wait 10 seconds and then start the
engine.
In addition to the above, there are
instances in which the smart key system does not operate properly because
of the circumstances of use. For details, see “Smart key system” on page
27 in Section 1−2.
In cases other than those described
above, it is possible that a problem has
occurred in an area other than the start
system. See “If your vehicle will not start”
on page 314 in Section 4.
When the battery is disconnected or
run down, the push button start function
memorizes the current mode. After you
reconnect, replace, or recharge the battery, the memorized mode is selected automatically. In any of these cases, turn off
the engine if the engine comes on.
Wait 10 seconds to start the engine after
the battery has been reconnected. The
engine may not start on the first try. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
NOTICE
Do not race a cold engine.
If the green indicator light on the
If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, have the
engine checked immediately.
“ENGINE START STOP” switch flashes
and the smart key system warning light
on the instrument cluster comes on,
the steering wheel is locked.
To free it, rock the steering wheel
slightly while pressing the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch.
If the amber indicator light on the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch flashes
and the smart key system warning light
on the instrument cluster comes on,
there is a problem in the push button
start function or the steering lock function.
Contact your Toyota dealer and have
your vehicle and all keys inspected.
299
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving and parking using
smart key system
(A) A warning buzzer sounds once from
the instrument cluster when the ignition switch is turned on
TIPS FOR USING SMART KEY SYSTEM
When using the smart key system, it is
possible to start or stop the engine as
long as the key is on your person.
This indicates that the driver has gotten
into the vehicle without the key. The smart
key system warning light on the instrument panel will come on.
For this reason, it is possible that a passenger may remove the key from the vehicle without the driver being aware of the
fact. In such a case, it is not possible to
restart the engine after having turned it
off. In addition, it is possible that one may
get out of the vehicle without being aware
that the ignition switch has not been
turned off completely.
When driving or getting in or out of the
vehicle, drivers should make sure that
they are carrying the key.
CAUTION
Operate the ignition switch only after taking care that the key is in the vehicle.
(B) A warning buzzer beeps repeatedly
from the instrument cluster when
opening the driver’s door
Smart key system warning light
SYSTEM FUNCTION REMINDERS
Follow the instructions described below if
any of the following warnings occur:
Do not touch the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch (engine switch) while
driving.
If you have to make an emergency stop,
press and hold the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.
300
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
This indicates that the ignition switch is
not set at OFF although the transmission
selector lever has been set in the “P”
position.
Get out of the vehicle only after turning
off the engine by pressing the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch and checking that
the ignition switch indicator light has gone
off.
(C) A warning buzzer sounds once from
the instrument cluster, accompanied
by three warning sounds from the
vehicle when the driver gets out of
the vehicle and closes the door
This indicates that the driver is attempting
to leave the vehicle carrying the key, neglecting to follow the instructions for case
(B) above. In addition, the smart key system warning light on the instrument panel
will come on.
Get out of the vehicle only after turning
off the engine by pressing the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch and checking that
the ignition switch indicator light has gone
off. If the driver returns to the vehicle
without carrying the key and begins driving, a warning buzzer will sound once
more.
(D) A warning buzzer sounds from the
vehicle for 2 seconds after locking
the door with the door handle switch
(E) A warning buzzer sounds continuously from the instrument cluster
when opening the driver’s door
This indicates that the driver is attempting
to lock the doors while carrying the key,
neglecting to follow the instructions for
cases (B) and (C) above.
This indicates that the transmission selector lever is in a position other than “P”
and that the ignition switch is not set at
OFF.
Lock the doors only after turning off the
engine by pressing the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch and checking that the ignition switch indicator light has gone off.
Get out of the vehicle only after setting
the transmission selector lever in the “P”
position, turning off the engine by pressing
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch and
checking that the ignition switch indicator
light has gone off.
A warning buzzer that sounds even though
the engine has been turned off indicates
that you are attempting to lock the vehicle
with the keys still in the vehicle.
Leave the vehicle only after making sure
that you are carrying the key.
301
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(F) A warning buzzer sounds continuously from the instrument cluster
and from the vehicle when closing
the door after getting out of the vehicle
(G) A warning buzzer sounds once from
the instrument cluster and three
times from the vehicle when a passenger is getting out of the vehicle
This indicates that the driver is attempting
to leave the vehicle carrying the key, neglecting to follow the instructions for case
(E) above. The smart key system warning
light on the instrument panel will come on.
This indicates that the passenger is attempting to leave the vehicle carrying the
key, without the ignition switch is not set
at OFF. The smart key system warning
light on the instrument panel will also
come on.
Get out of the vehicle only after setting
the transmission selector lever in the “P”
position, turning off the engine by pressing
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch and
checking that the ignition switch indicator
light has gone off.
When passengers get out of the vehicle,
care should be taken to leave the key
with the driver. If the driver begins driving
after a passenger gets out of the vehicle
carrying the key, a warning buzzer will
sound once more.
(H) A warning buzzer sounds from the
vehicle for 2 seconds when locking
the vehicle from the outside with the
door handle switch
This indicates that the driver is attempting
to lock the door with the key still in the
vehicle.
Leave the vehicle only after making sure
that you are carrying the key.
302
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(I) A warning buzzer sounds once from
the instrument cluster when turning
off the ignition switch
This indicates that the
(This warning buzzer
the engine has been
switch has been set
minutes or more.)
key battery is low.
sounds only when
on or the ignition
at the ON for 20
Change the key battery ahead of time in
order to ensure that the smart key system
properly.
(J) A warning buzzer sounds continuously from the instrument cluster
when opening the driver’s door with
the ignition switch turned off.
This indicates that the steering wheel is
not locked. Turn the engine off and then
open the door in order to lock the steering
wheel.
(K) The “ENGINE START STOP” switch
flashes green once every second.
This indicates that the steering lock is
stuck. To free it, rock the steering wheel
slightly while pressing the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch.
THEFT PREVENTION FUNCTION
When the engine is turned off, the engine immobilizer system is automatically set. (See “Engine immobilizer system” on page 16 in Section 1−2.)
When the driver’s door is opened after
(L) The “ENGINE START STOP” switch
flashes amber once every 2 seconds.
turning off the engine,
wheel will lock.
This indicates a problem with the push
button start function or the steering lock
function. Have your vehicle checked at a
Toyota dealer.
When the vehicle’s battery is discharged, the steering lock function may
not operate properly.
the steering
Tips for driving in various
conditions
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.
This will allow you much better control.
Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle. Avoid driving
onto high, sharp−edged objects and
other road hazards. Failure to do so
can lead to severe tire damage such
as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps
or travelling on a bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.
When parking on a hill, turn the front
wheels until they touch the curb so
that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the
parking brake, and place the transmission in “P”. If necessary, block the
wheels.
Washing your vehicle or driving through
deep water may get the brakes wet. To
see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you, and then
press the pedal lightly. If you do not
feel a normal braking force, the brakes
are probably wet. To dry them, drive
the vehicle cautiously while lightly
pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not
work safely, pull to the side of the road
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.
303
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Winter driving tips
CAUTION
Before driving off, make sure the
parking brake is fully released and
the parking brake reminder light is
off.
Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. It can cause
dangerous overheating, needless
wear, and poor fuel economy.
To drive down a long or steep hill,
reduce your speed and downshift.
Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and
not work properly.
Be careful when accelerating, upshifting, downshifting or braking on
a slippery surface. Sudden acceleration or engine braking, could cause
the vehicle to skid or spin.
Do not drive in excess of the speed
limit. Even if the legal speed limit
permits it, do not drive over 140
km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle
has high−speed capability tires.
Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
result in tire failure, loss of control
and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine
whether the tires on your vehicle
are high−speed capability tires or
not before driving at such speeds.
Do not continue normal driving
when the brakes are wet. If they are
wet, your vehicle will require a
longer stopping distance, and it
may pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will not hold the vehicle
securely.
Make sure you have a proper freeze
protection for engine coolant.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
See “Checking the engine coolant level”
on page 358 in Section 7−2 for details of
coolant type selection.
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35C
(−31F).
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42C
(−44F).
NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.
304
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Dinghy towing
Check the condition of the battery and
cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of
any battery, so it must be in top shape to
provide enough power for winter starting.
Section 7−3 tells you how to visually inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer and
most service stations will be pleased to
check the level of charge.
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is
suitable for the cold weather.
See page 357 in Section 7−2 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your vehicle during winter
months may cause harder starting. If you
are not sure about which oil to use, call
your Toyota dealer—they will be pleased
to help.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the
locks to keep them from freezing.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not use your parking brake when
there is a possibility it could freeze.
When parking, put the transmission into
“P” and block the rear wheels. Do not use
the parking brake, or snow or water accumulated in and around the parking brake
mechanism may freeze, making it hard to
release.
Keep ice and snow from accumulating
under the fenders.
Ice and snow built up under your fenders
can make steering difficult. During bad
winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.
Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.
Depending on where you are driving,
we recommend you carry some emergency equipment.
This product is available at your Toyota
dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.
Some of the things you might put in the
vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,
bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.
Your vehicle is not designed to be
dinghy towed (with four wheels on the
ground) behind a motorhome.
NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four
wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to your vehicle.
305
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a
passenger−carrying vehicle. Towing a
trailer will have an adverse effect on
handling, performance, braking, durability
and driving economy (fuel consumption,
etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend
on the proper use of correct equipment
and cautious driving habits. For your
safety and the safety of others, you must
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Toyota
warranties do not apply to damage or
malfunction caused by towing a trailer for
commercial purposes. Ask your local
Toyota dealer for further details before
towing.
NOTICE
When towing a trailer, be sure to consult your Toyota dealer for further information on additional requirements
such as a towing kit, etc.
WEIGHT LIMITS
Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, gross vehicle weight, gross
axle weight and trailer tongue load are
all within the limits.
The total trailer weight and tongue load
can be measured with platform scales
found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company,
junk yard, etc.
CAUTION
The
total trailer weight (trailer
weight plus its cargo load) must
not exceed 454 kg (1000 lb.). Exceeding this weight is dangerous.
306
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by
the hitch manufacturer. Even though
the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the
operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular
hitch assembly and never exceed
the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer−hitch. Exceeding
the maximum weight rating set by
the trailer hitch manufacturer can
cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries.
The load on either the front or rear
Total trailer weight
Tongue load
axle resulting from distribution of
the gross vehicle weight on both
axles must not exceed the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed
on the Certification Label.
Tongue load
Total trailer weight
100 = 9 to 11%
The gross vehicle weight must not
The trailer cargo load should be
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the sum of weights
of the unloaded vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer
tongue load. It also includes the
weight of any special equipment
installed on your vehicle.
distributed so that the tongue load
is 9 to 11% of the total trailer
weight, not exceeding the maximum
of 45 kg (100 lb.). Never load the
trailer with more weight in the back
than in the front. About 60% of the
trailer load should be in the front
half of the trailer and the remaining
40% in the rear.
307
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
HITCHES
BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS
Use only a hitch which is recom-
Toyota
mended by the hitch manufacturer and
conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.
recommends trailers with
brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
Follow the directions supplied by the
A safety chain must always be used
hitch manufacturer, and bolt the hitch
securely to the rear bumper. Lubricate
the hitch ball with a light coat of
grease.
between the towing vehicle and the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the
chain for turns. The chain should
cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated. For correct safety
chain procedures, follow the hitch or
trailer manufacturer’s recommendations.
Toyota recommends removing the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing
a trailer to reduce the possibility of
additional damage caused by the hitch
if your vehicle is struck from behind.
After removing the hitch, seal any
mounting holes in the vehicle body to
prevent entry of pollutants such as exhaust fumes, dirt, water, etc.
NOTICE
Do not use axle−mounted hitches as
they can cause damage to the axle
housing, wheel bearings, wheels or
tires. Also, never install a hitch which
may interfere with the normal function
of an Energy Absorbing Bumper.
CAUTION
Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system as it would lower its
braking effectiveness.
308
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Never tow a trailer without using a
safety chain securely attached to
both the trailer and the vehicle. If
damage occurs to the coupling unit
or hitch ball, there is danger of the
trailer wandering over into another
lane.
TIRES
Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are
properly inflated. See Section 7−2 and
Section 8 for instructions.
The trailer tires should be inflated to
the pressure recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the total
trailer weight.
TRAILER LIGHTS
Trailer lights must comply with federal,
state/provincial and local regulations.
See your local recreational vehicle
dealer or rental agency for the correct
type of wiring and relays for your trailer. Check for correct operation of the
turn signals and stop lights each time
you hitch up. Direct splicing may damage your vehicle’s electrical system
and cause a malfunction of your lights.
BREAK−IN SCHEDULE
Toyota recommends that you do not
tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a
vehicle with any new power train component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first
800 km (500 miles) of driving.
Make sure the trailer cargo is securely
loaded so that it can not shift.
Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any applicable federal, state/
provincial or local regulations. If not,
install the rear view mirrors required
for towing purpose.
MAINTENANCE
TRAILER TOWING TIPS
If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will
handle differently than when not towing. The three main causes of vehicle−
trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading.
Keep these in mind when towing:
require more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load. For this information, please refer to the scheduled
maintenance information in the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.
Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing
ball and bracket after approximately
1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.
PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK
Check that your vehicle remains level
when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has
an abnormal nose−up or nose−down
condition, and check for improper
tongue load, overload, worn suspension
or other possible causes.
Before starting out, check operation of
the lights and all vehicle−trailer connections. After driving a short distance,
stop and recheck the lights and connections. Before actually towing a trailer, practice turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away from
traffic until you learn the feel.
Backing with a trailer is difficult and
requires practice. Grip the bottom of
the steering wheel and move your hand
to the left to move the trailer to the
left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally opposite to that
when backing without a trailer.) Also,
just turn the steering wheel a little at
a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged
turning. Have someone guide you when
backing to reduce the risk of an accident.
Because stopping distance may be increased, vehicle−to−vehicle distance
should be increased when towing a
trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of
speed, allow at least one vehicle and
trailer length between you and the vehicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as
you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of control. This is especially
true on wet or slippery surfaces.
Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
309
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.
Be careful when passing other ve-
The trailer could hit your vehicle in a
tight turn. Slow down before making a
turn to avoid the necessity of sudden
braking.
hicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do
not forget the length of your trailer and
be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.
Remember that when making a turn,
the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the
turn. Therefore, compensate for this by
making a larger than normal turning
radius with your vehicle.
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your vehicle
and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention
to the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being passed by large
trucks or buses, which may cause your
vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying
happens, firmly grip the steering wheel
and reduce speed immediately but
gradually. Never increase speed. Steer
straight ahead. If you make no extreme
correction with the steering or brakes,
the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.
In order to maintain engine braking efficiency do not use overdrive.
Because of the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat
on hot days (at temperatures over
30C [85F]) when going up a long or
steep grade with a trailer. If the engine
coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air
conditioning (if in use), pull off the road
and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If
your vehicle overheats” in Section 4.
Always place wheel blocks under both
the vehicle and trailer wheels when
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid parking on a slope with a trailer, but if it
cannot be avoided, do so only after
performing the following:
310
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Apply the brakes and hold.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.
When restarting out after parking on a
slope:
1. With the transmission in “P” position,
start the engine. Be sure to keep the
brake pedal depressed.
2. Shift into gear.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal and slowly pull or back away
from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply
your brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.
How to save fuel and make
your vehicle last longer
CAUTION
Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or
the posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower. Because instability (swaying) of a towing vehicle−
trailer
combination
usually
increases as the speed increases, exceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may
cause loss of control.
Slow down and downshift before
descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down
too long or too frequently. This
could cause the brakes to overheat
and result in reduced braking efficiency.
Improving fuel economy is easy—just take
it easy. It will help make your vehicle last
longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and
repairs:
Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Underinflation causes
tire wear and wastes fuel. See page
361 in Section 7−2 for instructions.
Do not carry unneeded weight in
your vehicle. Excess weight puts a
heavier load on the engine, causing
greater fuel consumption.
Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once
the engine is running smoothly, begin
driving—but gently. Remember, however, that on cold winter days this may
take a little longer.
Put the selector lever into the “D”
when engine braking is not required.
Driving without the “D” position will reduce the fuel economy. (For details,
see “Automatic transmission” on page
161 in Section 1−7.)
Accelerate
slowly and
Avoid jackrabbit starts.
smoothly.
Avoid engine lugging or over−revving. Use a gear position suitable for
the road on which you are travelling.
Avoid continuous speeding up and
slowing down.
wastes fuel.
Stop−and−go
driving
Avoid
unnecessary stopping and
braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try
to time the traffic signals so you only
need to stop as little as possible or
take advantage of through streets to
avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear
on your brakes.
Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams
whenever possible.
Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal. This causes premature wear,
overheating and poor fuel economy.
Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you drive, the greater
the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.
Avoid long engine idling. If you have
a long wait and you are not in traffic,
it is better to turn off the engine and
start again later.
311
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Keep the front wheels in proper
alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and
slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire
wear but also puts an extra load on
the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.
Keep the bottom of your vehicle free
from mud, etc. This not only lessens
weight but also helps prevent corrosion.
CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast
down hills. Your power steering and
brake booster will not function without the engine running. Also, the
emission control system operates
properly only when the engine is running.
Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in
top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil
and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.
all lower engine performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For longer
life of all parts and lower operating
costs, keep all maintenance work on
schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle
receives more frequent maintenance.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
312
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
4
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
In case of an emergency
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot increase engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
314
318
318
319
320
329
330
331
332
332
313
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If your vehicle will not start—
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure
you have followed the correct starting
procedure given in “How to start the
engine” on page 296 in Section 3 and that
you have sufficient fuel. Also, check
whether the other keys will start the
engine. If they work, your key may be
broken. Have the key checked at your
Toyota dealer. If none of your keys work,
there may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. Call your Toyota dealer. (See
“Keys” on pages 12 or 14 in Section 1−2.)
If the engine is not turning over or is
turning over too slowly—
(b) Starting a flooded engine
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will
not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop.
NOTICE
Do not pull− or push−start the vehicle. Your vehicle may suddenly
move when the engine starts, and
may damage itself or cause a collision. Also the three−way catalytic
converter may overheat and become a
fire hazard.
1. Check that the battery terminals are
tight and clean.
If the engine turns over at its normal
speed but will not start—
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch
on the interior light.
1. Set the ignition switch to ACC or off
and try starting the engine again.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out
when the starter is cranked, the battery
is discharged. You may try jump starting. See “(c) Jump starting” on page
315 for further instructions.
2. If the engine will not start, the engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded
engine” on page 314 for further instructions.
4. With smart key system—If the engine
does not start even after the battery
has been recharged or replace, see
“(d) Starting the engine after a battery
discharge” on page 318 for further instruction.
3. If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota
dealer or qualified repair shop.
314
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the engine will not start, your engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking.
With key cylinder−type ignition switch—If
this happens, turn the key to “START”
with the accelerator pedal fully depressed.
Keep the key and accelerator pedal in
these positions for 15 seconds and release them. Then try starting the engine
with your foot off the accelerator pedal.
With smart key system—If this happens,
press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
(engine switch) with the brake pedal and
the accelerator pedal fully depressed, and
hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
for about 30 seconds. Then the cranking
hold function stops cranking automatically,
and you can try starting the engine with
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the engine does not start, wait a few
minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer
or qualified repair shop for assistance.
(c) Jump starting
NOTICE
With
key
cylinder−type
ignition
switch—Do not crank for more than
30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
To avoid serious personal injury and
damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns,
electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be
followed precisely.
If you are unsure about how to follow this
procedure, we strongly recommend that
you seek the help of a competent mechanic or towing service.
CAUTION
Batteries
contain
sulfuric
acid
which is poisonous and corrosive.
Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling
acid on your skin, clothing, or vehicle.
The gas normally produced by a
battery will explode if a flame or
spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do
not smoke or light a match while
jump starting.
NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must
be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you
are sure that the booster battery is
correct.
If you should accidentally get acid
on yourself or in your eyes, remove
any contaminated clothing and flush
the affected area with water immediately. Then get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue
to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while en route to the medical
office.
315
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Discharged battery
1. If the booster battery is installed in
another vehicle, make sure the vehicles
are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
When boosting, use the battery of
matching or higher quality. Any other
battery may be difficult to jump start
with.
If jump starting is difficult, charge the
battery for several minutes.
Jumper cable
Booster
battery
Positive
terminal
(“+” mark)
Jumper cable
Discharged battery
Positive terminal
(“+” mark)
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs
from the booster and discharged batteries. Lay a cloth over the open vents
on the batteries. (This helps reduce the
explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)
4. Make the cable connections in the order a, b, c, d.
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the
booster battery is not running, start it
and let it run for a few minutes. During
jump starting, run the engine at about
2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.
b. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the positive (red) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal on the booster
battery.
a. Connect the clamp of the positive
(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal on the discharged battery.
316
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Negative terminal
(“−” mark)
Booster
battery
c. Connect the clamp of the negative
(black) jumper cable to the negative
(−) terminal on the booster battery.
d. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the negative (black) jumper cable to
a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic
point of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
The recommended connecting point is
shown in the following illustration:
Connecting point
Do not connect the cable to or near
any part that moves when the engine
is cranked.
CAUTION
When making the connections, to
avoid serious injury, do not lean over
the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the correct battery terminals or the ground.
5. With smart key system—Charge the
discharged battery with the jumper
cables connected for approximately 5
minutes. At this time, run the engine in
the vehicle with the booster battery at
about 2000 rpm with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.
If the first start attempt is not successful...
6. Start your engine in the normal way.
After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm
for several minutes with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.
If the another attempt is not successful,
the battery may be depleted. Have it checked at your Toyota dealer.
Check that the clamp on the jumper
cables are tight. Recharge the discharged
battery with the jumper cables connected
for several minutes and restart your engine in the normal way.
7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the
exact reverse order: the negative cable
and then the positive cable.
8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover
cloths—they may now contain sulfuric
acid.
9. If removed, replace all the battery vent
plugs.
With smart key system—The engine may
not restart even after battery charging or
replacement. If this happens, see “(d)
Starting the engine after a battery discharge” described below.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent (for example, lights left on),
you should have it checked at your Toyota
dealer.
317
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(d) Starting the engine after a
battery discharge
If your engine stalls while
driving
If you cannot increase engine
speed
With smart key system only—
If your engine stalls while driving...
In the event that the battery is discharged, the engine may not restart
even after the battery is recharged or
replaced. For safety reasons, the engine
may be disabled when battery voltage
is extremely low. If the engine is disabled, the start system must be normalized.
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
If engine speed does not increase when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there
may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.
To normalize the start system:
1. Shift the transmission to the “P” position and set the ignition switch off.
2. Open and close any of the doors.
3. Start the engine.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Set the ignition switch to ACC or off,
and try starting the engine again.
If the engine will not start, see “If your
vehicle will not start” on page 314 in this
Section.
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the
power assist for the brakes and
steering will not work so steering
and braking will be much harder
than usual.
Vehicles with smart key system—
If the engine stalls while driving, do
not open the driver’s door until the
vehicle comes to a complete stop.
Opening the driver’s door locks the
steering wheel, resulting in loss of
steering control.
318
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
set the ignition switch to ACC or off.
CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear
a loud knocking or pinging noise, the
engine has probably overheated. You
should follow this procedure...
3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the
radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.
However, note that water draining from
the air conditioning is normal if it has
been used.
1. Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency
flashers. Put the transmission in “P”
and apply the parking brake. Turn off
the air conditioning if it is being used.
CAUTION
2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.
Wait until the steam subsides before
opening the hood. If there is no coolant
boiling over or steam, leave the engine
running and make sure the electric
cooling fan is operating. If it is not,
turn the ignition off.
CAUTION
To help avoid personal injury, keep
the hood closed until there is no
steam. Escaping steam or coolant is
a sign of very high pressure.
6. After the engine coolant temperature
has cooled to normal, again check the
coolant level in the reservoir. If necessary, bring it up to half full again. Serious coolant loss indicates a leak in the
system. You should have it checked as
soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.
When the engine is running, keep
hands and clothing away from the
moving fan and engine drive belts.
4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer
for assistance.
5. If there are no obvious leaks, check
the coolant reservoir. If it is dry, add
coolant to the reservoir while the engine is running. Fill it about half full.
For the coolant type, see “Coolant type
selection” on page 358 in Section 7−2.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove the radiator
cap when the engine and radiator are
hot. Serious injury could result from
scalding hot fluid and steam blown
out under pressure.
319
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you have a flat tire—
1. Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place
well away from the traffic. Avoid
stopping on the center divider of
a highway. Park on a level spot
with firm ground.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your
emergency flashers.
3. Firmly set the parking brake and
put the transmission in “P”.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.
5. Read the following instructions
thoroughly.
CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe
the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury:
Follow jacking instructions.
Do not put any part of your
body under the vehicle supported by the jack. Otherwise,
personal injury may occur.
Do not start or run the engine
while your vehicle is supported
by the jack.
Stop the vehicle on a level firm
ground, firmly set the parking
brake and put the transmission
in “P”. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being
changed if necessary.
320
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising
the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the
vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and
cause personal injury.
Never get under the vehicle
when the vehicle is supported
by the jack alone.
Use the jack only for lifting
your vehicle during wheel
changing.
Do not raise the vehicle with
someone in the vehicle.
When raising the vehicle, do
not place any objects on top
of or underneath the jack.
Raise the vehicle only high
enough to remove and change
the tire.
The compact spare tire can be used
many times, if necessary. It has tread
life of up to 4800 km (3000 miles) depending on road conditions and your
driving habits. When tread wear indicators appear on the tire, replace the
tire.
See also the tire information on page
363 in Section 7−2 for details on the
tread wear indicators and other service information.
NOTICE
Do not continue driving with a
deflated tire. Driving even a
short distance can damage a
tire and wheel beyond repair.
Compact spare tire
The compact spare tire is designed
for temporary emergency use only.
The compact spare tire is identified
by
the
distinctive
wording
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded
into the side wall of the tire.
The compact spare tire saves space
in your luggage compartment, and its
lighter weight helps to improve fuel
economy and permits easier installation in case of a flat tire.
CAUTION
The compact spare tire was designed especially for your Toyota. Do not use it on any other
vehicle.
Do not use more than one compact spare tire at the same
time.
The pressure for the compact
spare tire must be 420 kPa (4.2
kgf/cm2 or bar, 60 psi).
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50
mph) when driving with the
compact spare tire.
321
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Required tools and spare
tire
Replace the compact spare tire
with the standard tire as soon
as possible.
Avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden deceleration and sharp
turns with the compact spare
tire.
NOTICE
Your ground clearance is reduced when the compact spare
tire is installed so avoid driving
over obstacles and drive slowly
on rough, unpaved roads and
speed bumps. Also, do not attempt to go through an automatic car wash as the vehicle
may get caught, resulting in
damage.
1. Get the required tools and
spare tire.
1. Jack handle
2. Wheel nut wrench
3. Jack
4. Spare tire
To prepare yourself for an emergency,
you should familiarize yourself with
the use of the jack, each of the tools
and their storage locations.
322
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To remove the jack, turn the jack joint
by hand until the jack becomes free.
—Blocking the wheel
To store the jack, align the hole of the
jack head with the vehicle hook. Turn
the jack joint until the jack base fits
securely with the vehicle body.
This prevents the jack from flying forward during a collision or sudden
stop.
To remove the spare tire:
1. Loosen the nut and remove it.
2. Remove the spare tire cover.
3. Loosen the bolt and remove it.
4. Remove the spacer.
Then take the spare tire out of the
vehicle.
When storing the spare tire, put it in
place with the outer side of the wheel
facing up. Then secure the tire by repeating the above removal steps in
reverse order to prevent it from flying
forward during a collision or sudden
braking.
2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep the
vehicle from rolling when it is
jacked up.
When blocking the wheel, place a
wheel block in front of one of the front
wheels or behind one of the rear
wheels.
323
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Removing wheel ornament
(on some models)
—Loosening wheel nuts
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. The nuts may loose
and the wheels may fall off,
which could cause a serious accident.
3. Remove the wheel ornament.
Pry off the wheel ornament, using the
beveled end of the wheel nut wrench
as shown.
CAUTION
Do not try to pull off the ornament by hand. Take due care in
handling the ornament to avoid
unexpected personal injury.
4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before
raising the vehicle.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise
to loosen. To get maximum leverage,
fit the wrench to the nut so that the
handle is on the right side, as shown
above. Grab the wrench near the end
of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does
not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrew them about one−half turn.
324
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Positioning the jack
—Raising your vehicle
CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when
the vehicle is supported by the
jack alone.
5. Position the jack at the correct
jack point as shown.
Make sure the jack is positioned on
a level and solid place.
6. After making sure that no one
is in the vehicle, raise it high
enough so that the spare tire
can be installed.
Remember you will need more ground
clearance when putting on the spare
tire than when removing the flat tire.
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack
handle into the jack (it is a loose fit)
and turn it clockwise. As the jack
touches the vehicle and begins to lift,
double−check that it is properly positioned.
325
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Changing wheels
7. Remove the wheel nuts and
change tires.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it
aside.
Roll the spare wheel into position and
align the holes in the wheel with the
bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get
at least the top bolt started through
its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it
back over the other bolts.
—Reinstalling wheel nuts
Before putting on wheels, remove any
corrosion on the mounting surfaces
with a wire brush or such. Installation
of wheels without good metal−to−metal contact at the mounting surface can
cause wheel nuts to loosen and
eventually cause a wheel to come off
while driving.
326
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end
inward) and tighten them as much as
you can by hand. Press back on the
tire and see if you can tighten them
more.
—Lowering your vehicle
CAUTION
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead
to overtightening the nuts and
damaging the bolts. The nuts
may loose and the wheels may
fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or
grease on any bolt or nut, clean
it.
9. Lower the vehicle completely
and tighten the wheel nuts.
Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.
Use only the wheel nut wrench and
turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.
Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands,
such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.
Make sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in
the order shown. Repeat the process
until all the nuts are tight.
When lowering the vehicle,
make sure all portions of your
body and all other persons
around will not be injured as
the vehicle is lowered to the
ground.
Have the wheel nuts tightened
with torque wrench to 103 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soon
as possible after changing
wheels. Otherwise, the nuts
may loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could cause
a serious accident.
327
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Reinstalling wheel ornament
(on some models)
—After changing wheels
CAUTION
Take due care in handling the
ornament to avoid unexpected
personal injury.
Do not attach a heavily damaged plastic wheel ornament.
It may fly off the wheel and
cause accidents while the vehicle is moving.
10.Reinstall the wheel ornament.
Align the cutout of the wheel ornament with the valve stem as shown.
Then press hand firmly on one side
of wheel ornament and then firmly tap
the other side around the edge of
wheel ornament with the heel of your
hand to snap into place.
328
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
11. Check the air pressure of the replaced tire.
Adjust the air pressure to the specification designated on page 386 in
Section 8. If the pressure is lower,
drive slowly to the nearest service
station and fill to the correct pressure.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflation valve cap as dirt and moisture
could get into the valve core and
possibly cause air leakage. If the cap
is missing, have a new one put on as
soon as possible.
12.Restow all the tools, jack and
flat tire securely.
As soon after changing wheels as
possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the
torque specified on page 386 in Section 8 with a torque wrench. Have a
technician repair the flat tire and replace the spare tire with it.
If your vehicle becomes stuck
Initial adjustment of the tire
pressure warning system is necessary after you have replaced
your tires or wheels. See “Tire
pressure warning system” on
page 169 in Section 1−7.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the
tools, jack and flat tire are securely in place in their storage
location to reduce the possibility
of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,
mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt
to rock the vehicle free by moving it
forward and backward.
Vehicles with traction control system—
The traction control system can be
turned off to become unstuck to allow
the tires to spin enough to remove the
vehicle from the obstruction. Contact
your Toyota dealer for detailed information.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the
rocking operation the vehicle may
suddenly move forward or backward
as it becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or objects.
NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the
following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other
parts.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever
or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse
gear.
Do not race the engine and avoid
spinning the wheels.
If your vehicle remains stuck after
rocking the vehicle several times,
consider other ways such as towing.
329
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If your vehicle needs to be
towed—
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—
—From front
—From rear
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck service. In consultation with them, have
your vehicle towed using either (a) or
(b).
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
Proper equipment will help ensure that
your vehicle is not damaged while being
towed. Commercial operators are generally
aware of the state/provincial and local
laws pertaining to towing.
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is
towed incorrectly. Although most operators
know the correct procedure, it is possible
to make a mistake. To avoid damage to
your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.
(b) Using flat bed truck
Use a safety chain system for all towing,
and abide by the state/provincial and local
laws. The wheels and axle on the ground
must be in good condition. If they are
damaged, use a towing dolly.
From front—Release the parking brake.
NOTICE
When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for
towing at the opposite end of the
raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper
and/or underbody of the towed vehicle
will be damaged during towing.
From rear—Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
NOTICE
Never tow from the rear with the front
wheels on the ground, as this may
cause serious damage to the transmission.
(b) Using flat bed truck
330
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you cannot shift automatic
transmission selector lever
(c) Towing with sling
type truck
(c) Towing with sling type truck
NOTICE
Do not tow with sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may
cause body damage.
If you cannot shift the selector lever
out of “P” position to other positions
even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button as follows:
3. Insert your finger into the
push down the shift lock
button. You can shift out
position only while pushing
ton.
hole to
override
of “P”
the but-
1. Make sure the engine is off and the
parking brake is applied.
4. Shift into “N” position.
2. Pry up the cover with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.
6. Start the engine. For your safety,
keep the brake pedal depressed.
5. Insert the cover.
Be sure to have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
331
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you lose your keys
If you lose your wireless
remote control transmitter
You can purchase a new key at your
Toyota dealer if you can give them the
key number and master key.
You can purchase a new wireless remote control transmitter at your Toyota
dealer.
Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch—Even if you lose only one key,
contact your Toyota dealer at the earliest
opportunity to make a new key. If you
lose all your master keys, you cannot
make new keys; the whole engine immobilizer system must be replaced.
Have the registered identification numbers
of your transmitters deleted from your vehicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to avoid the possibility of theft or
an accident. Then, have the identification
number of your new transmitter registered.
At the same time, you must bring all of
the remaining transmitters to have them
registered again as well.
Vehicles with smart key system—If you
lose any of your keys, contact your
Toyota dealer to have new keys made.
Lost keys increase the danger of vehicle
theft. Bring all of the remaining vehicle
keys when you visit your Toyota dealer.
You can use the wireless remote control
function with the new transmitter. Contact
your Toyota dealer for detailed information.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on
pages 12 or 14 in Section 1−2.
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and
you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota
dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must
break a window to get in, we suggest
breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace.
Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from
the glass.
332
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
5
CORROSION PREVENTION AND
APPEARANCE CARE
Corrosion prevention and appearance care
Protecting your Toyota from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Washing and waxing your Toyota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
333
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Protecting your Toyota from
corrosion
Toyota, through the diligent research, design and use of the most advanced
technology available, helps prevent corrosion and provides you with the finest quality vehicle construction. Now, it is up to
you. Proper care of your Toyota can help
ensure long−term corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion
to your vehicle are:
The accumulation of road salt, dirt and
moisture in hard−to−reach areas under
the vehicle.
Chipping
of paint, or undercoating
caused by minor accidents or by
stones and gravel.
Care is especially important if you live
in particular areas or operate your vehicle under certain environmental conditions:
Road salt or dust control chemicals will
accelerate corrosion, as will the presence of salt in the air near the sea−
coast or in areas of industrial pollution.
High humidity accelerates corrosion especially when temperatures range just
above the freezing point.
Wetness or dampness to certain parts
High pressure water or steam is effec-
of your vehicle for an extended period
of time, may cause corrosion even
though other parts of the vehicle may
be dry.
tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside
and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to simply wet the
mud and debris without removing. The
lower edge of doors, rocker panels and
frame members have drain holes which
should not be allowed to clog with dirt
as trapped water in these areas can
cause corrosion.
High ambient temperatures can cause
corrosion to those components of the
vehicle which do not dry quickly due to
lack of proper ventilation.
The above signifies the necessity to keep
your vehicle, particularly the underside, as
clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as
soon as possible.
Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over.
your
See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” on
page 335 for more tips.
Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of
course, necessary to keep your vehicle
clean by regular washing, but to prevent
corrosion, the following points should be
observed:
Check the condition of your vehicle’s
paint and trim. If you find any chips or
scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone
through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.
To help prevent corrosion on
Toyota, follow these guidelines:
If you drive on salted roads in the
winter or if you live near the ocean,
you should hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month to minimize corrosion.
334
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Washing and waxing your
Toyota
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the
floor mats and could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make
sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should be
transported in proper containers. If a spill
or leak should occur, immediately clean
and dry the area.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you
drive on salted or gravel roads, mud
shields help protect your vehicle. Full−size
shields, which come as near to the ground
as possible, are the best. We recommend
that the fittings and the area where the
shields are installed be treated to resist
corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be
happy to assist in supplying and installing
the shields if they are recommended for
your area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated
garage or a roofed place. Do not park
your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in
the garage, or if you drive it covered with
water or snow, your garage may be so
damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your
garage is heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.
Washing your Toyota
Keep your
washing.
vehicle
clean
by
regular
The following cases may cause weakness
to the paint or corrosion to the body and
parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible.
When driving in a coastal area
When driving on a road sprinkled with
antifreeze
When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,
CAUTION
When cleaning under floor or chassis, be careful not to injure your
hands.
Exhaust gases cause the exhaust
pipe to become quite hot. When
washing the vehicle, be careful not
to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
bird droppings and carcass of an insect
When driving in areas where there is
a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or
chemical substances
When the vehicle becomes remarkably
dirty with dust and mud
Hand−washing your Toyota
Work in the shade and wait until the
vehicle body is not warm to the touch.
1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the
underside of the vehicle or the wheel
wells.
2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,
mixed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and
keep it wet by dipping it frequently into
the wash water. Do not rub hard—let
the soap and water remove the dirt.
Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−
pressure car wash, for example) at or
near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler
door opened. If the water enters the air
vent, you may experience trouble with refueling or rough engine idling.
335
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic
wheel ornaments are damaged easily by
organic substances. If any organic substances splash an ornament, be sure to
wash them off with water and check if the
ornament is damaged.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap
or neutral detergent.
Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not
scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper
faces are soft.
Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not use
organic substances or scrub them with a
hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or
cleaners that are marked safe for painted
surfaces.
3. Rinse
thoroughly—dried
soap
can
cause streaking. In hot weather you
may need to rinse each section right
after you wash it.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances
(gasoline, kerosene, benzine or
strong solvents), which may be toxic or cause damage.
Do not scrub any part of the vehicle with a hard brush, which may
cause damage.
Automatic car wash
Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but remember that the
paint can be scratched by some types of
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the
washing process itself. Scratching reduces
paint durability and gloss, especially on
darker colors. The manager of the car
wash should be able to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on
your vehicle.
Waxing your Toyota
Polishing and waxing is recommended
to maintain the original beauty of your
Toyota’s finish.
Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle
surface does not repel water well.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing, even if you are
using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If
the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car−cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and
precautions. Be sure to polish and wax
the chrome trim as well as the paint.
Windshield washer nozzles: Make sure
that the nozzles do not become blocked
when waxing. If a nozzle becomes
blocked, contact your Toyota dealer to
have the vehicle serviced.
NOTICE
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle
using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not
rub or press hard—you might scratch
the paint.
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.
336
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cleaning the interior
Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the
surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause
damage to the lenses. If you accidentally
put wax on the light surfaces, wipe or
wash it off.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water
does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches.
CAUTION
Be careful not to splash water or
spill liquid on the floor. This may
prevent the side and curtain shield
airbags from activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.
Do not wash the vehicle floor with
water, or allow water to get onto
the floor when cleaning the vehicle
interior or exterior. Water may get
into audio components or other
electrical components above or under the floor carpet (or mat) and
cause a malfunction; and it may
cause body corrosion.
Vinyl interior
The vinyl upholstery may be easily
cleaned with a mild soap or detergent
and water.
First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or
soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few
minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt
and wipe off the soap with a clean damp
cloth. If all the dirt does not come off,
repeat the procedure. Commercial foaming−type vinyl cleaners are also available
which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.
NOTICE
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline
or window cleaner on the interior.
Carpets
Use a good foam−type
clean the carpets.
shampoo
to
Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove
as much dirt as possible. Several types of
foam cleaners are available; some are in
aerosol cans and others are powders or
liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,
use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles.
337
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not apply water—the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible. Read the shampoo instructions
and follow them closely.
Windows
NOTICE
The windows may be cleaned with any
household window cleaner.
NOTICE
Seat belts
The seat belts may be cleaned with
mild soap and water or with lukewarm
water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear,
fraying, or cuts.
NOTICE
Do not use dye or bleach on the
belts—it may weaken them.
Do not use the belts until they become dry.
When cleaning the inside of the
rear window, be careful not to
scratch or damage the heater wires
or connectors.
When cleaning the inside of the
rear window, be careful not to
scratch or damage the printed antenna.
Air conditioning control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel, console panel,
and switches
Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the
surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing
agents, make sure their ingredients
do not include the substances mentioned above.
If you use a liquid car freshener, do
not spill the liquid onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain the
ingredients mentioned
above. Immediately clean any spill
using the method mentioned above.
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off dirt.
Leather interior
The leather upholstery may be cleaned
with neutral detergent for wool.
Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for
wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces
of detergent with a clean damp cloth.
338
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
After cleaning or whenever any part of the
leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean
cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area.
NOTICE
If a stain should fail to come out
with a neutral detergent, apply a
cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
Never use organic substances such
as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or
alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could
cause discoloring.
The interior of your vehicle is apt
to heat up on hot summer days, so
avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or
containing wax as these tend to
stick to leather when warm.
Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining.
If you have any questions about the
cleaning of your Toyota, your local
Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer
them.
Use of a nylon brush or synthetic
fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the
fine grained surface of the leather.
Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful
to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
Long exposure to direct sunlight
may cause the leather surface to
harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in
the summer.
339
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
340
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
6
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE
Vehicle maintenance and care
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . .
342
343
345
346
For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
341
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance requirements
Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for
fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time
and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day−to−day care, is
more important than ever before to ensure
smooth, and trouble−free, safe, and economical drivings.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make
sure the specified maintenance, including
general maintenance service, is performed.
Note that both the new vehicle and emission control system warranties specify that
proper maintenance and care must be performed. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for complete warranty information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day−
to−day care practices that are important to
your vehicle for proper operation. It is the
owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed
regularly.
Scheduled maintenance
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.
For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
It is recommended that any replacement
parts used for maintenance or for the
repair of the emission control system
be Toyota supplied.
The owner may elect to use non−Toyota
supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use
of replacement parts which are not of
equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.
You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual without invalidating this warranty. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” for complete warranty information.
Where to go for service?
Toyota technicians are well−trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership
training programs. They learn to work on
Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,
rather than while they are working on it.
You can be confident that your Toyota
dealer’s service department performs the
best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle—reliably and economically.
Your copy of the repair order is proof that
all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If any problems should arise with your vehicle while
under warranty, your Toyota dealer will
promptly take care of it. Again, be sure
to keep a copy of the repair order for any
service performed on your Toyota.
These checks or inspections can be done
either by yourself or a qualified technician,
or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be
pleased to do them at a nominal cost.
342
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
General maintenance
What about do−it−yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy
to do yourself if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented on page 347 in
Section 7.
If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are recommended. Please be aware that do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your warranty
coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the details.
Listed below are the general maintenance
items that should be performed as frequently as specified. In addition to checking the items listed, if you notice any
unusual noise, smell or vibration, you
should investigate the cause or take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop immediately. It is recommended that any problem you notice be
brought to the attention of your dealer or
the qualified service shop for their advice.
Engine coolant level
Make sure the coolant level is between
the “F” and “L” lines on the see−through
reservoir when the engine is cold. See
page 358 in Section 7−2 for additional
information.
CAUTION
Battery condition
Check the battery condition by the indicator color. See page 373 in Section 7−3 for
additional information.
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you run the engine.
IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Items listed below should be checked
from time to time, e.g. each time when
refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the
tank. See page 375 in Section 7−3 for
additional information.
Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and
condenser are clean and not blocked with
leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 359 in
Section 7−2 for additional information.
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.
See page 359 in Section 7−2 for additional information.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the
engine turned off and the vehicle parked
on a level spot. See page 356 in Section
7−2 for additional information.
Power steering fluid level
Check the level through the reservoir. The
level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”
range depending on the fluid temperature.
See page 360 in Section 7−2 for additional information.
343
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Exhaust system
If you notice any change in the sound of
the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have
the cause located and corrected immediately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on
page 270 in Section 2.)
Seat belts
Check that the seat belt system such as
buckles, retractors and anchors operate
properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt
webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
uneven pedal effort or catching.
Check for wear or cracks whenever they
do not wipe cleanly. See page 375 in
Section 7−3 for additional information.
Brake pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
that the pedal has the proper clearance.
Check the brake booster function.
Fluid leaks
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. If you smell fuel
fumes or notice any leak, have the cause
found and corrected immediately.
Items listed below should be checked
regularly, e.g. while performing periodic
services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Lights
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights
are all working. Check headlight aim.
Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers function properly.
Steering wheel
Check that it has the specified free play.
Be alert for changes in steering condition,
such as hard steering or strange noise.
Seats
Check that all front seat controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches lock
securely in any position. Check that the
head restraints move up and down
smoothly and that the locks hold securely
in any latched position.
Brakes
In a safe place, check that the brakes do
not pull to one side when applied.
Parking brake
Check that the pedal has the proper travel
and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle
is held securely with only the parking
brake applied.
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
Check the lock release button of the selector lever for proper and smooth operation. On a safe incline, check that your
vehicle is held securely with the selector
lever in “P” position and all brakes released.
344
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Items listed below should be performed
from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Wiper blades
Doors and engine hood
Check that all doors including trunk lid
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least once a
month. See page 361 in Section 7−2
for additional information.
Does your vehicle need
repairing?
Tire surface and wheel nuts
Check the tires carefully for cuts,
damage or excessive wear. See page
363 in Section 7−2 for additional information. When checking the tires,
make sure no nuts are missing, and
check the nuts for looseness. Tighten
them if necessary.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the
maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) See page 365 in Section 7−2
for additional information.
Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that
indicate service is needed. Some important clues are as follows:
Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A leak under the vehicle (however, water dripping from the air conditioning
after use is normal.)
If you notice any of these clues, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.
Change in exhaust sound (This may
indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide
leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)
Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal
when cornering; uneven tire wear
Vehicle pulls to one side when driving
straight on a level road
Strange noises related to suspension
movement
Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy
feeling brake pedal; pedal almost
touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side
when braking
Engine coolant temperature continually
higher than normal
345
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD
(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation
of the emission control system. When the
OBD system determines that a problem
exists somewhere in the emission control
system, the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on. In this case, your vehicle may
not pass the I/M test and need to be
repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to
service the vehicle.
Even
does
pass
have
if the malfunction indicator lamp
not come on, your vehicle may not
the I/M test as readiness codes
not been set in the OBD system.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had
come on recently due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips, but the
error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are
taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
even the malfunction indicator lamp does
not come on, contact your Toyota dealer
to prepare the vehicle for re−testing.
Readiness codes are automatically set
during ordinary driving. However, when the
battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on
your driving habits, the codes may not be
completely set.
346
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Pocket Reference Guide.
Flip over to see your
Open This and Really Get into
Your New Toyota
The Ultimate
Interactive Owner’s Guide
2007 Pocket Reference Guide
Customer Experience Center 1-800-331-4331
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
d
edb
y:
MN
00452-PRG07-AVA
Printed in USA 07/06
Flip over to see your
iGuide.
2007 Avalon
2007
Avalon
This Pocket Reference Guide is a summary of basic vehicle
operations. It contains brief descriptions of fundamental
operations so you can locate and use the vehicle’s main
equipment quickly and easily.
The Pocket Reference Guide is not intended as a substitute for
the Owner’s Manual located in the vehicle’s glove box. We
strongly encourage you to review the Owner’s Manual and
supplementary manuals so you will have a better understanding
of the vehicle’s capabilities and limitations.
Your dealership and the entire staff of Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A., Inc. wish you many years of satisfied driving in your
new Avalon.
! A word about safe vehicle operations
MACINTOSH
SYSTEM 9.X,
OS X 10.2
POWERPC
64MB OF RAM
24-BIT COLOR
CD-ROM DRIVE
Pay special attention to the boxed “
” information
highlighted in this reference guide and throughout the
Owner’s Manual. Each box contains safe operating
instructions to help you avoid injury or equipment
malfunction.
PC
WINDOWS 98
PENTIUM III 600MHZ
64MB OF RAM
800 X 600 MONITOR
16-BIT COLOR
CD-ROM DRIVE
This Pocket Reference Guide is not a full description of
Avalon operations. Every Avalon owner should review the
Owner’s Manual that accompanies this vehicle.
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
All information in this Pocket Reference Guide is current at
the time of printing. Toyota reserves the right to make
changes at any time without notice.
This iGuide is designed to be played on
any computer—PC or Macintosh.
Avalon iGuide
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX
Air Conditioning/Heating
Audio
Auto lock functions1
Automatic Transmission
Clock
Cruise control
Cup holders
Door locks
Dynamic Laser Cruise Control
Garage door opener (HomeLink®)2
Light control-Instrument panel
Lights & turn signals
Moonroof
Parking brake
Power outlets
Seat adjustments-Front
Seat adjustments-Rear
Seat ventilators/heaters
Seats-Head restraints
Smart Key1
Steering wheel switches
Sunshade-Rear
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
Windows
Windshield wiper & washer
15
16-17
10
11
10
19
21
18
20
11
21
14
19
10
21
12
12
18
12
9
18
19
10
13
13
SAFETY AND
Doors-Child safety locks
Seat belt comfort guide
Seat belts
Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor
Spare tire & tools
Tire Pressure Warning System reset
Trunk-Internal release
22
23
22
22
23
22
23
EMERGENCY FEATURES
1
2
Programmable by customer. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for instructions and
more information.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
1
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
8
6
7
4-5
4
2-3
7
8
6
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Engine maintenance
Fuel tank door release and cap
Hood release
Indicator symbols
Instrument cluster
Instrument panel
Keyless entry1
Remote engine starter
Trunk release
OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
OVERVIEW
Instrument panel
OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Cruise control or Dynamic Laser Cruise Control1
Dynamic Laser Cruise Control distance button1
Tilt steering lock release
Telescopic steering lock release
Glass breakage sensor1
Rear electric sunshade button1
Hood release lever
Trunk release button
Fuel tank door release button
Power rear view mirror controls
1
2
If equipped
For details, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
3
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Instrument panel light control
Headlight, turn signal and front fog light1 controls
Steering wheel audio controls
Speech command button1, 2
Steering wheel climate controls
Wiper and washer controls
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger1 switch
Emergency flasher switch
Audio system
Air Conditioning controls
Auxiliary box, 12V DC Power outlet/Cigarette lighter and ashtray1,
cassette player1 or navigation controller1, 2
Ignition switch/Engine switch1
OVERVIEW
Indicator cluster
Vehicle Stability Control/Traction Control warning
OVERVIEW
Airbag SRS warning1
Low Tire Pressure Warning1
Low windshield washer fluid level warning
Automatic headlight leveling system warning
Engine oil replacement reminder1
Engine coolant temperature
Service indicator and reminder
Tachometer
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Low fuel level warning light
Trip meter reset
Odometer and two trip meters
Sequential shift display
Dynamic Laser Cruise Control display
Dynamic Laser Cruise Control master warning light
Smart Key system warning1
Engine immobilizer/Theft deterrent system indicator
Headlight indicator
Turn signal indicator
Automatic Transmission indicator
Slip indicator
Indicator symbols
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Headlight high beam indicator
Cruise control indicator2 or Dynamic Laser Cruise Control indicator3
Brake system warning1
Dynamic Laser Cruise Control ready mode indicator
Driver seat belt reminder1
(alarm will sound if speed is over 9 mph)
Front passenger seat belt reminder1
(alarm will sound if speed is over 9 mph)
Conventional cruise control mode indicator
Anti-lock Brake System warning light1
Battery warning1
Malfunction/Check Engine indicator1
the anti-lock brake system (ABS) function is in action, you may feel the
pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to let the anti-lock
system work for you, just hold the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not
the brake as this will result in reduced braking performance.
“AIRBAG ON” indicator
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator
Open door warning1
1
For details, refer to “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers,” Section 1-6, 2007
Owner’s Manual.
2
If this light flashes, refer to “Cruise control,” Section 1-7, 2007 Owner’s Manual.
light flashes, refer to “Dynamic laser cruise control,” Section 1-7, 2007 Owner’s
Manual.
3 If this
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
5
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
When
brake
brake
pump
Low engine oil pressure warning1
OVERVIEW
Fuel tank door release and cap
Hood release
OVERVIEW
Turn
Push
Pull up
latch and
raise hood
Pull
NOTE: Tighten until one click
is heard. If the cap is not
tightened enough, Check
Engine “
” indicator may
illuminate.
Store
Keyless entry
Beep sound can be switched “ON” or “OFF.” Refer to the Owner’s Manual
for more details.
Locking operation
Unlocking operation
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Trunk release
Push ONCE: Driver door
TWICE: All doors
Push
NOTE: After unlocking, if a door is
Push to activate/deactivate
trunk opener.
Push
Trunk lid operation
Trunk manual release
Open
not opened within 30 seconds, all
doors will relock for safety.
Alarm operation
Push and hold
Push and hold
Pull down
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
7
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Pull to
open trunk
OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Remote engine starter (if equipped)
Smart Key* (if equipped)
Start operation
Start function
OVERVIEW
Green indicator ON
Carrying
Push twice, then push and hold.
Depress
Stop operation
Push
NOTE: Gear shift lever must be in Park and brake pedal depressed.
Power (without starting engine)
Without depressing the brake pedal, pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch will change the operation mode in succession from:
or
Push “
” or push “
” once then push “
” and hold.
Refer to the Remote Engine Starter Owner’s Manual for more details.
ON
OFF
Accessories such as the radio will operate.
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Engine maintenance
ACC
Power ON, the engine not running.
All systems OFF.
Locking/Unlocking operation
Carry remote
to lock/unlock
Front door unlock
Push
Grasp
Trunk open
Push
Note: Regularly scheduled maintenance, including oil changes, will
* Driver door unlocking function can be programmed to unlock driver door
help extend the life of your vehicle and maintain performance.
only, or all doors. Grasping passenger handle will unlock all doors.
Please refer to the “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet,”
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
NOTE: Doors may also be locked/unlocked using remote.
Supplement.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8
9
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Front door lock
Engine coolant reservoir
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil level dipstick
Windshield washer fluid tank
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Auto lock functions
Automatic Transmission
P
OVERVIEW
Automatic door locks can be programmed to operate in 4 different modes,
or turned OFF.
-Doors lock when shifting from “Park.”
-Doors lock when the vehicle speed goes above approximately 12 mph.
-Doors unlock when shifting into “Park.”
-Doors unlock when the ignition switch is set from ON to ACC or OFF and
driver’s door is opened.
Park1
Reverse
Neutral
“D”
Drive
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.
Parking brake
“S”
Set: Depress
Release: Depress again
1
The ignition switch must be ON, and the brake
pedal depressed to shift from “Park.”
“S” (Sequential) mode
Push shift lever to the left from “D” position.
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
Length
Angle
Downshifting increases power going uphill, or provides engine braking
downhill. For best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, always
drive with the shift lever in the “D” position.
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
“S” position:
+: Upshift (Push and release)
-: Downshift (Pull and release)
Garage door opener (HomeLink®)*
(if equipped)
Lock release lever
Lock release lever
NOTE: Do not attempt to adjust while the vehicle is in motion.
H-Hour set
M-Minute set
:00-Round off minutes
NOTE: In Navigation System-equipped vehicles, clock settings are in
navigation setup menu.
10
Garage door openers manufactured under license from HomeLink®* can be
programmed to operate garage doors, estate gates, security lighting, etc.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.
For programming assistance, contact the Toyota Customer Experience
Center at 1-800-331-4331, or visit http://www.homelink.com.
* HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
11
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Clock
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Windshield wiper & washer
Seat adjustments-Front
Manual seat
Power seat
With interval wiper
OVERVIEW
Single wipe
Adjust interval
Interval wipe
Pull to wash and wipe
Slow
Fast
With AUTO rain-sensing wiper (if equipped)
Adjust AUTO speed
Single wipe
AUTO speed
Pull to wash and wipe
* If equipped
Slow
Seat adjustments-Rear
Fast
Seatback angle lever
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Seatback angle
Position
Leg support (driver side only)*
Position, cushion angle and height (driver side only)
Seatback angle
Lumbar support (driver side only)
Windows
Up
Window lock switch
Up
Down
Down
Front
Rear
Automatic operation (Front windows) Push the switch completely down
or pull it completely up and release to fully open or close. To stop window
mid-way, lightly push the switch in the opposite direction.
Window lock switch Deactivates all passenger windows. Driver’s window
remains operable.
Lock release buttons
Lock release button
NOTE: If battery is disconnected, the front windows need to be
reinitialized. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
12
13
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Seats-Head restraints
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Lights & turn signals
Air Conditioning/Heating
Headlights
OVERVIEW
Headlights
Parking lights
AUTO
DRL OFF
High beam
Low beam
-Daytime Running Light system (DRL) Automatically turns on the
headlights at a reduced intensity.
-Automatic light cut off system Will automatically turn lights off after a
delay of 30 seconds, or the lock switch on remote may be pushed.
Turn signals
Right turn
Lane change
Lane change
Left turn
Turn
Front fog lights come on only when the headlights are on low beam.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
14
15
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Front fog lights (if equipped)
Air Conditioning display
Windshield defogger
Temperature
Automatic climate control ON
Climate control OFF
Air Conditioning ON/OFF
Fresh or recirculate cabin air
Rear defogger
Air flow vent “MODE”
In “
” or “
” mode, use fresh air (“
” indicator “OFF”) to
reduce window fogging.
Fan speed
“DUAL” button
Indicator ON: Separate temperature settings for driver and
passenger.
Indicator OFF: Synchronize temperature settings for driver and
passenger.
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
High beam flasher
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER (if equipped)
Audio
Audio operation screen
.”
RADIO
To preset stations Tune in the desired station and hold down a preset
button (1-6) until you hear a beep. Push desired preset button (1-6) to
select.
To scan stations Push “SCAN.” Push and hold to scan preset stations. Push
again to hold selection.
Type 1
Preset buttons - functions in other
modes indicated above number.
Eject CD
Push to turn
ON/OFF
Mode
Station/CD
track scan
>
Push to adjust tone &
balance1
CD PLAYER
To scan tracks on a disc Push and hold “SCAN.” Push again to hold
selection.
*
Load CD(s)
Select radio
station/CD track
Select disc
(Type 2 & 3)
Type 3 additional functions *
CD Changer (Type 2 & 3)
-To load one disc Push “LOAD” and insert one disc.
-To load multiple discs Push and hold “LOAD” until you hear a beep.
Insert one disc. Wait until the green indicator illuminates and shutter
opens to insert next disc.
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Type 2 additional functions
View CD
text
RDS (Radio Data System-FM only)(Type 3 only)
-Push DISC/TYPE “ ” or “ ” to view current program genre. Push again
within 6 seconds to select new genre.
-Push “SEEK/TRACK” or “SCAN” to find same genre programs.
-Push “TEXT” to receive information transmitted from radio stations.
>
CD Track select
Seek station
OVERVIEW
To fast forward Push “
To rewind Push “ .”
Select disc. View genre with
RDS system.
Traffic
information
Push
1
The mode changes with each push in succession from Bass, Midrange
(Type 3 only), Treble, Fade, Balance. Turn the knob right or left to adjust
each mode.
* If equipped
Cassette tape player*
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
16
17
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
View radio and CD text
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Steering wheel switches
Audio control
Moonroof (if equipped)
“Mode” 2
1“v
Open
Temperature selector
Auto A/C ON/OFF
Close
Close
OVERVIEW
Volume control
v
“ v ”1
Tilting operation
Sliding operation
A/C control
Tilt
A/C OFF
Recommended
driving position
to minimize
wind noise.
v
”
-In radio mode Push to select a preset station; push and hold to seek the
next strong station.
-In tape mode* Push to skip up or down to next/previous track; push
and hold to fast forward or reverse.
-In CD mode Push to skip up or down to next/previous track.
NOTE: If battery is disconnected, the moonroof needs to be reinitialized.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.
Sunshade-Rear (if equipped)
2 “MODE”
Push to turn audio ON and select an audio mode. Push and hold to turn
the audio system “OFF.”
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
*
If equipped
Seat ventilators/heaters (if equipped)
Heater only
With ventilators
Push
NOTE: Sunshade will automatically go down when vehicle is shifted into
reverse. To raise again, push the button.
Cruise control
Functions
Turning system ON/OFF
Push
Turn
Push
Turn
Cancel1
Push knob to pop the controller out. Turn clockwise for heater, counter
clockwise for ventilator.
Lock
Set/Decrease
speed
1
2
The set speed may also be cancelled by depressing the brake pedal.
If vehicle speed falls below 25 mph, the set speed will not be resumed.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
18
19
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
System
ON/OFF
Door locks
Unlock
Resume2/
Increase speed
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Dynamic Laser Cruise Control (if equipped)
Light control-Instrument panel
Fixed speed mode
Brightness
control
+
With the knob turned fully
clockwise, instrument panel
lights will not dim when the
headlights are turned ON.
-
(1) To select conventional/fixed speed control Push the ON-OFF button.
Push the lever forward and hold until the “NORM.” indicator appears.
(2) To set, cancel and resume a speed Refer to instructions for Cruise
Control above.
OVERVIEW
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details and complete safety
precautions before attempting to use “Dynamic Laser Cruise Control.”
Power outlets
Auxiliary box (12V)
Console box (12V)
Distance control mode
Distance control mode will cruise at a set speed, decelerate to maintain
selected distance from a slower vehicle in front of you, and accelerate
back up to the selected speed if the vehicle in front of you changes lanes
or speeds up.
(1) To select distance control mode Push the ON-OFF button. The
“READY” and “CRUISE” indicator lights will come on.
(2) To set, cancel and resume a speed Refer to instructions for Cruise
Control on the previous page.
Note: Once vehicle speed is set, pushing lever up toward “+ RES” will
increase speed to the nearest 5 mph, and then in 5 mph increments.
Pushing lever down toward “- SET” will reduce speed in the same way.
Cup holders
Rear with console box
Front
Rear
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
LONG
MIDDLE
SHORT
(3) To change the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Pull the distance switch briefly toward you; the setting changes
progressively from LONG to MIDDLE to SHORT.
20
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
NOTE: Designed for car accessories. Ignition/Engine switch must be in the
“ACC” or “ON” position to be used.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
21
SAFETY AND
EMERGENCY FEATURES
Seat belts
Seat belt comfort guide
OVERVIEW
Take up
slack
Too high
Keep as low on
hips as possible
If belt is fully extended, then retracted even slightly, it cannot be reextended beyond that point, unless fully retracted again. This feature is
used to help hold child restraint systems securely.
To find more information about seat belts, and how to install a child
restraint system, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
Rear seat outside position guides provide added comfort for children who
have outgrown child restraints.
Spare tire & tools
Tool location
Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor
Jack handle
Wheel nut wrench
Jack
Spare tire
Removing the spare tire
Doors-Child safety locks
Loosen and remove the nut.
Remove the spare tire cover.
Loosen and remove the bolt.
Remove the spacer.
Moving the lever to “LOCK”
will allow the door to be
opened only from the
outside.
Rear door
Tire Pressure Warning System reset
Pull
If tire pressure becomes critically low on any of the tires (including fullsize spare/excluding compact spare), indicator comes on. Pushing “SET”
button should not turn off the light. Correctly adjusting tire inflation will
turn off the light after a few minutes. After replacing/rotating tire or
wheels, push and hold “SET” button until the indicator light blinks 3 times.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
23
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for tire changing and jack positioning
procedures.
Trunk-Internal release
22
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Push up, or squeeze
lock release to lower
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The Answers to Your Questions
Are Just a Click Away.
Now that you’re the proud owner of a new Toyota vehicle, you
may have questions about some of its controls and features. This
interactive iGuide is filled with easy-to-understand explanations of
all its key components. Full of helpful demonstrations and tips, its
user-friendly format makes learning all about your new vehicle fun
and easy. (There’s even a copy of your Owner’s Manual on the CD.)
For added convenience, you can also access all of this information as
well as links to additional sources, by going to www.toyotaiguide.com.
Of course, your Toyota dealer is always there to help you with quality
service and support. For additional assistance, please call our toll-free
customer number at 1-800-331-4331.
Thank you for choosing Toyota. We hope this iGuide will help you enjoy
many years of safe and pleasant driving.
Note: All of the information contained in this iGuide and more is also available at
www.toyotaiguide.com.
2007
Avalon
This Pocket Reference Guide is a summary of basic vehicle
operations. It contains brief descriptions of fundamental
operations so you can locate and use the vehicle’s main
equipment quickly and easily.
The Pocket Reference Guide is not intended as a substitute for
the Owner’s Manual located in the vehicle’s glove box. We
strongly encourage you to review the Owner’s Manual and
supplementary manuals so you will have a better understanding
of the vehicle’s capabilities and limitations.
Your dealership and the entire staff of Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A., Inc. wish you many years of satisfied driving in your
new Avalon.
! A word about safe vehicle operations
MACINTOSH
SYSTEM 9.X,
OS X 10.2
POWERPC
64MB OF RAM
24-BIT COLOR
CD-ROM DRIVE
Pay special attention to the boxed “
” information
highlighted in this reference guide and throughout the
Owner’s Manual. Each box contains safe operating
instructions to help you avoid injury or equipment
malfunction.
PC
WINDOWS 98
PENTIUM III 600MHZ
64MB OF RAM
800 X 600 MONITOR
16-BIT COLOR
CD-ROM DRIVE
This Pocket Reference Guide is not a full description of
Avalon operations. Every Avalon owner should review the
Owner’s Manual that accompanies this vehicle.
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
All information in this Pocket Reference Guide is current at
the time of printing. Toyota reserves the right to make
changes at any time without notice.
This iGuide is designed to be played on
any computer—PC or Macintosh.
Avalon iGuide
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
7− 1
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Introduction
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do−it−yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
348
349
349
351
352
347
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Engine compartment overview
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Engine oil level dipstick
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Fuse block
7. Battery
8. Radiator
9. Electric cooling fans
10. Condenser
11. Windshield washer fluid tank
348
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do−it−yourself service
precautions
Fuse locations
If you perform maintenance by yourself,
be sure to follow the correct procedure
given in this Section.
Spare fuses
You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating
problems.
Performing
do−it−yourself
maintenance
during the warranty period may affect your
warranty coverage. Read the separate
Toyota Warranty statement for details and
suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for
those items that are relatively easy for an
owner to perform. As explained in Section
6, there are still a number of items that
must be done by a qualified technician
with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do−
it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts and
tools” on page 352 in this Section.
Utmost care
ing on your
injury. Here
you should
serve:
should be taken when workvehicle to prevent accidental
are a few precautions that
be especially careful to ob-
349
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
When the engine is running, keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from the moving fan and engine
drive
belts.
(Removing
rings,
watches, and ties is advisable.)
Right
after driving, the engine
compartment—the engine, radiator,
exhaust manifold and spark plug
boots, etc.—will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil, fluids
and spark plugs may also be hot.
If the engine is hot, do not remove
the radiator cap or loosen the drain
plugs to prevent burning yourself.
Do not leave anything that may
burn easily, such as paper or rags,
in the engine compartment.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames around fuel or the
battery. Their fumes are flammable.
Do not get under your vehicle with
just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.
Be sure that the ignition is off if
Be extremely cautious when work-
you work near the electric cooling
fans or radiator grille. With the
ignition on, the electric cooling fans
will automatically start to run if the
engine coolant temperature is high
and/or the air conditioning is on.
ing on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
Use eye protection whenever you
work on or under your vehicle
where you may be exposed to flying
or falling material, fluid spray, etc.
Used engine oil contains potentially
harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged
and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your
skin, wash thoroughly with soap
and water.
Do not leave used oil within the
reach of children.
Dispose of used oil and filter only
in a safe and acceptable manner.
Do not dispose of used oil and filter in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your dealer or
a service station for information
concerning recycling or disposal.
350
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTICE
Remember that battery and ignition
cables carry high currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.
Add only “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate,
non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid
organic acid technology to fill the
radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for
the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water (for Canada).
If you spill some of the coolant, be
sure to wash it off with water to
prevent it from damaging the parts
or paint.
Positioning the jack
Do not allow dirt or anything else
to fall through the spark plug holes.
When jacking up your vehicle with the
jack, position the jack correctly as
shown in the illustrations.
Do not pry the outer electrode of a
spark plug against the center electrode.
CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe the
following to reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury:
Use only spark plugs of the specified type. Using other types will
cause engine damage, loss of performance or radio noise.
Follow jacking instructions.
Do not put any part of your body
Do not reuse iridium−tipped spark
plugs by cleaning or regapping.
Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid and power steering fluid,
or the transmission and power
steering could be damaged.
under the vehicle supported by the
jack. Personal injury may occur.
Front
Do not start or run the engine while
your vehicle is supported by the
jack.
Stop the vehicle on a level firm
Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed, or excessive engine
wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine
compartment.
ground, firmly set the parking brake
and put the transmission in “P”.
Block the wheels on the opposite
side of the jack up point if necessary.
Be careful not to scratch the glass
surface with the wiper frame.
Make sure to set the jack properly
in the jack point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or
may allow the vehicle to fall off the
jack and cause personal injury.
When closing the engine hood,
check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.
Rear
351
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Parts and tools
Never get under the vehicle when
the vehicle is supported by the jack
alone; use vehicle support stands.
Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.
When raising the vehicle, do not
place any objects on top of or underneath the jack.
NOTICE
Make sure to place the jack correctly,
or your vehicle may be damaged.
Here is a list of parts and tools you will
need to perform do−it−yourself maintenance. Remember all Toyota parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must
be metric.
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Tools:
Funnel (only for adding coolant)
CHECKING BRAKE FLUID
Parts (if level is low):
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
brake fluid
Parts (if level is low):
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
See page 357 in Section 7−2 for details about engine oil selection.
Tools:
THE
ENGINE
transmission
DEXRONII or III
COOLANT
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or
similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−
life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a
mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%
coolant and 45% deionized water (for
Canada).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID
Automatic
Parts (if level is low):
352
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Parts (if level is low):
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding oil)
CHECKING
LEVEL
Tools:
fluid
Tools:
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
Tools:
Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional
clamp bolts)
wrench
(for
terminal
CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
ADDING WASHER FLUID
Parts:
Water
Washer fluid containing antifreeze
(for winter use)
Tools:
Funnel
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
Parts:
Bulb with same number and wattage
rating as original (See charts in “Replacing light bulbs” on page 377 in
Section 7−3.)
Tools:
Screwdriver
353
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
354
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
7− 2
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Engine and Chassis
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
356
358
359
359
360
361
363
365
367
368
369
355
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Checking the engine oil level
Low level
Full level
CAUTION
Be careful not to touch the hot exhaust manifold.
NOTICE
Be careful not to drop engine oil on
the vehicle components.
Add oil
O.K.
Too full
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level
on the dipstick.
1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle
should be on level ground. After turning
off the engine, wait a few minutes for
the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under
the end and wipe it clean.
3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far
as it will go, or the reading will not be
correct.
If the oil level is below or only slightly
above the low level, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine
oil in small quantities at a time, checking
the dipstick. We recommend that you use
a funnel when adding oil.
The approximate quantity of oil needed to
raise the level between low and full on the
dipstick is indicated as follows:
1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp. qt.)
For the engine oil capacity, see “Service
specifications” on page 383 in Section 8.
When the level reaches within the correct
range, install the filler cap hand−tight.
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil
level while holding a rag under the
end.
356
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTICE
Be careful not to spill engine oil on
the vehicle components.
Avoid overfilling, or
could be damaged.
the
engine
Check the oil level on the dipstick
once again after adding the oil.
ENGINE OIL SELECTION
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.
Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good
fuel economy, and good starting in cold
weather.
If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available, SAE
10W−30 oil may be used. However, it
should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at
the next oil change.
Recommended viscosity:
SAE 5W−30
Oil identification mark
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you
should use.
Outside temperature
357
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Checking the engine coolant
level
Look at the see−through coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between
the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.
If the level is low, add the coolant. (For
the coolant type, see “Coolant type
selection” described below.)
To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” is available, which has been
specifically tested and approved for all
Toyota engines.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details about “Toyota Genuine Motor
Oil”.
Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage
your engine cooling system.
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary
with engine temperature. However, if the
level is on or below the “L” line, add
coolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
If the coolant level drops within a short
time after replenishing, there may be a
leak in the system. Visually check the
radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain
cock and water pump.
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35C
(−31F).
If you can find no leak, have your Toyota
dealer test the cap pressure and check
for leaks in the cooling system.
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42C
(−44F).
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not
remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
358
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.
Checking the radiator and
condenser
Checking brake fluid
If any of the above parts are extremely
dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the radiator or condenser when the engine is hot after
driving.
NOTICE
Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant”, which has been tested to
ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
result in malfunction of your engine
coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology and has been specifically
designed to avoid engine cooling system
malfunction on Toyota vehicles.
Please contact
further details.
your
Toyota dealer
To prevent damage to the radiator
and condenser, do not perform the
work by yourself.
To check the fluid level, simply look at
the see−through reservoir. The level
should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the reservoir.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
down slightly as the brake pads wear. So
be sure to keep the reservoir filled.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it
may indicate a serious mechanical problem.
for
359
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Checking power steering fluid
If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the
brake reservoir.
Remove and replace the reservoir cap by
hand. Fill the brake fluid to the dotted
line. This brings the fluid to the correct
level when you put the cap back on.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from
the air, and excess moisture can cause a
dangerous loss of braking.
If cold O.K.
If hot O.K.
Close
Open
If cold
add
If hot
add
CAUTION
Take care when filling the reservoir
because brake fluid can harm your
hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your
hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable
with your hands or eyes, go to the
doctor.
NOTICE
Check the fluid level through the reservoir. If necessary, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80
km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little
more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is
hot (60C—80C or 140F—175F). You
may also check the level when the fluid
is
cold
(about
room
temperature,
10C—30C or 50F—85F) if the engine
has not been run for about five hours.
If you spill some of the fluid, be sure
to wipe it off to prevent it from damaging the parts or paintwork.
360
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Clean all dirt from the outside of the reservoir tank and look at the fluid level. If
the fluid is cold, the level should be in the
“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, the
fluid level should be in the “HOT” range.
If the level is at the low side of either
range, add automatic transmission fluid
DEXRONII or III to bring the level within
the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,
turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering box
case, vane pump and hose connections
for leaks or damage.
CAUTION
The reservoir tank may be hot so be
careful not to burn yourself.
NOTICE
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be damaged.
Checking tire inflation
pressure
AI72001
Keep your tire inflation pressures
at the proper level.
The recommended cold tire inflation
pressures, tire sizes and the combined weight of occupants and cargo
(vehicle capacity weight) are described on page 382 in Section 8.
They are also on the tire and loading
information label.
You should check the tire inflation
pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month. And do not forget the
spare!
The following instructions for
checking tire inflation pressure
should be observed:
The
pressure
should
be
checked only when the tires are
cold. If your vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours and has
not been driven for more than 1.5
km or 1 mile since, you will get
an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
Always use a tire pressure
gauge. The appearance of a tire
can be misleading. Besides, tire
inflation pressures that are even
just a few pounds off can degrade
ride and handling.
Take special care when adding
air to the compact spare tire.
The smaller tire size can gain
pressure very quickly. Add compressed air in small quantities and
check the pressure often until it
reaches the specified pressure.
361
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not bleed or reduce tire
inflation pressure after driving.
It is normal for the tire inflation
pressure to be higher after driving.
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passenger and luggage weight should be located so
that the vehicle is balanced.
Tire pressure gauge
5. After completing the tire inflation
pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the
valve and check for leakage.
6. Install the tire valve cap.
If a gauge and air pump are not available, have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the tire valve cap.
2. Press the tip of the tire pressure
gauge to the tire valve.
3. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
4. In case the tire inflation pressure
is not within the prescribed range,
insert the compressed air from the
valve. In case of applying too
much air, press the center of the
valve and release the air to adjust.
362
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve
caps. Without the valve caps, dirt
or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage.
If the caps have been lost, have
new ones put on as soon as possible.
Incorrect tire inflation pressure may
waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less safe to drive.
If a tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
Checking and replacing tires
CAUTION
Keep your tires properly inflated.
Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries.
Low tire pressure (underinflation)—
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts from an
overheated tire
Poor sealing of the tire bead
Wheel deformation and/or tire
separation
A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards
High tire pressure (overinflation)—
Poor handling
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards
Tread wear indicator
CHECKING YOUR TIRES
Check the tire’s tread for tread
wear indicators. If the indicators
show, replace the tires. The location of tread wear indicators is
shown by the “TWI” or “∆ ” marks,
etc., molded on the sidewall of
each tire.
363
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The tires on your Toyota have built−in
tread wear indicators to help you
know when the tires need replacement. When the tread depth wears to
1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can see the
indicators in two or more adjacent
grooves, the tire should be replaced.
The lower the tread, the higher the
risk of skidding.
The effectiveness of snow tires is
lost if the tread wears down below
4 mm (0.16 in.).
If you have tire damage such as
cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage, the tire
should be replaced.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be
properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage, it
should be replaced. If you are not
sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
If air loss occurs while driving, do not
continue driving. Driving even a short
distance can damage a tire beyond
repair.
Any tires which are over 6 years
old must be checked by a qualified
technician even if damage is not
obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they
have never or seldom been used.
This applies also to the spare tire and
tires stored for future use.
364
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
REPLACING YOUR TIRES
When replacing a tire, use a tire of
the same size and construction,
and the same or greater maximum
load as the originally installed
tires.
Using any other size or type of tire
may seriously affect handling, ride,
speedometer/odometer calibration,
ground clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow
chains.
Check that the maximum load of the
replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)
of either the front axle or the rear
axle, whichever is greater. As for the
maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall
of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label.
For details about the side wall of the
tire and the Certification Label, see
pages 277 and 279.
Rotating tires
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident
may occur resulting in death or
serious injuries.
Do not mix radial, bias belted,
or bias−ply tires on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Do not use tires other than the
manufacturer’s recommended
size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics
resulting in loss of control.
Toyota recommends all four tires,
or at least both of the front or rear
tires be replaced at a time as a set.
See “If you have a flat tire” on page
320 for tire change procedure.
When a tire is replaced, the wheel
should always be balanced.
An unbalanced wheel may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Wheels
can get out of balance with regular
use and should therefore be balanced
occasionally.
When replacing a tubeless tire, the
air valve should also be replaced
with a new one.
Initial adjustment of the tire pressure warning system is necessary
after you have replaced your tires.
See “Tire pressure warning system” on page 169 in Section 1−7.
With a spare tire of the same
wheel type as the installed tires
365
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
With a spare tire of different
wheel type from the installed
tires
To equalize the wear and help extend tire life, Toyota recommends
that you rotate your tires according to the maintenance schedule.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual
Supplement”.)
However, the most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and
road surface conditions.
See “If you have a flat tire” on page
320 in Section 4 for tire change procedure.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out−
of−balance wheels, or severe braking.
366
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION
Do not include a compact spare
tire when rotating the tires. It is
designed for temporary use only.
Initial adjustment of the tire pressure warning system is necessary
after you have rotated your tires.
See “Tire pressure warning system” on page 169 in Section 1−7.
Installing snow tires and
chains
WHEN TO
CHAINS
USE
SNOW
TIRES
OR
Snow tires or chains are recommended
when driving on snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional tires
provide better traction than snow tires.
SNOW TIRE SELECTION
If you need snow tires, select tires of
the same size, construction and load
capacity as the originally installed tires.
SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION
Installing snow tires on the front wheels
only can lead to an excessive difference
in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of
vehicle control.
Cross chain
When storing removed tires, you should
store them in a cool dry place.
Do not use tires other than those mentioned above. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for
possible restrictions.
Mark the direction of rotation and be sure
to install them in the same direction when
replacing.
CAUTION
Do not drive with the snow tires
Do not use snow tires other than the
manufacturer’s recommended size, as
this may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of
control. Otherwise, an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Side chain
Snow tires should be installed on all
wheels.
CAUTION
incorrectly inflated.
Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)
with any type of snow tires.
TIRE CHAIN SELECTION
Use the tire chains of correct size.
For P215/60R16 and P215/55R17 tires,
use the following type chains.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Diameter of side chain
Width of side chain
Length of side chain
Diameter of cross chain
Width of cross chain
Length of cross chain
mm (in.)
3 (0.12)
10 (0.39)
30 (1.18)
4 (0.16)
14 (0.55)
25 (0.98)
367
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Replacing wheels
Regulations regarding the use of tire
chains vary according to location or
type of road, so always check local regulations before installing chains.
NOTICE
If the wrong combination of tire and
chain is used, the chains could damage the vehicle body.
CHAIN INSTALLATION
Install the chains on the front tires as
tightly as possible. Do not use tire
chains on the rear tires. Retighten
chains
after
driving
0.5—1.0
km
(1/4—1/2 mile).
When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain
manufacturer.
If wheel covers are used, they will be
scratched by the chain band, so remove
the covers before putting on the chains.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or
the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is
lower.
Drive
carefully avoiding bumps,
holes, and sharp turns, which may
cause the vehicle to bounce.
Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel
braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
When driving with chains installed,
be sure to drive carefully. Slow
down before entering curves to
avoid losing control of the vehicle.
Otherwise an accident may occur.
NOTICE
Do not attempt to use a tire chain on
the compact spare tire, as it may result in damage to the vehicle as well
as the tire.
368
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS
If you have wheel damage such as
bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the
wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,
the tire may slip off the wheel or cause
loss of handling control.
WHEEL SELECTION
When replacing wheels, care should be
taken to ensure that the wheels are replaced by ones with the same load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.
This must be observed on compact spare
tires, too.
Correct replacement wheels are available
at your Toyota dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may
adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to
the body and chassis.
Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent
wheels which have been straightened may
have structural damage and therefore
should not be used. Never use an inner
tube in a leaking wheel which is designed
for a tubeless tire.
CAUTION
Do not use wheels other than the
manufacturer’s recommended size, as
this may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of
control. Otherwise, an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Initial adjustment of the tire pressure
warning system is necessary after you
have replaced your wheels. See “Tire
pressure warning system” on page 169
in Section 1−7.
Aluminum wheel precautions
When installing aluminum wheels,
check that the wheel nuts are tight
after driving your vehicle the first 1600
km (1000 miles).
If
you have
changed your
wheel nuts are
1600 km (1000
rotated, repaired, or
tires, check that the
still tight after driving
miles).
When using tire chains, be careful not
to damage the aluminum wheels.
Use
only Toyota wheel nuts and
wrench designed for your aluminum
wheels.
When balancing your wheels, use only
Toyota balance weights or equivalent
and a plastic or rubber hammer.
As with any wheel, periodically check
your aluminum wheels for damage. If
damaged, replace immediately.
369
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
370
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
7− 3
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Electrical components
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the headlight aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
372
373
374
375
375
376
377
371
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Checking battery condition—
—Precautions
CAUTION
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and
explosive hydrogen gas.
Do not cause a spark from the battery with tools.
Do not smoke or light a match near
the battery.
The electrolyte contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin or
clothes.
Never ingest electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when
—Checking battery exterior
If electrolyte gets on your skin,
Terminals
thoroughly wash the contact area. If
you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
If electrolyte gets on your clothes,
there is a possibility of its soaking
through to your skin, so immediately take off the exposed clothing and
follow the procedure above, if necessary.
If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large quantity of water
or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable
oil. Then go immediately for emergency help.
Hold−down
clamp
Ground cable
Check the battery for corroded or loose
terminal connections, cracks, or loose
hold−down clamp.
a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off
with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the outside of the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion.
working near the battery.
Keep children away from the battery.
EMERGENCY MEASURES
b. If the terminal connections are loose,
tighten their clamp nuts—but do not
overtighten.
If electrolyte gets in your eyes,
flush your eyes with clean water
immediately and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge
or cloth while en route to the medical office.
c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only
enough to keep the battery firmly in
place. Overtightening may damage the
battery case.
372
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Checking battery condition
NOTICE
Be sure the engine and all accessories are off before performing maintenance.
When checking the battery, remove
the ground cable from the negative
terminal (“−” mark) first and reinstall it last.
During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas.
Type A
Green
Dark
Clear or
light yellow
Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed
on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.
Type B
Blue
White
Red
Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
Take care no solution gets into the
battery when washing it.
2. Be sure the power switch on the recharger is off when connecting the
charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.
CAUTION
Always charge the battery in an un-
CHECKING BY INDICATOR
If the battery is disconnected or run
down, the power window and moon roof
may not operate automatically and the jam
protection function will not function correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases,
you should normalize each system. To
normalize them, see “Power windows” on
page 41 and “Electric moon roof” on page
52 in Section 1−2.
Battery recharging precautions
Check the battery condition by the indicator color.
Indicator color
Type A
Type B
Green
Blue
Dark
Clear or
light
yellow
White
Red
Condition
Good
Charging necessary. Have battery
checked by your
Toyota dealer.
Have battery
checked by your
Toyota dealer.
confined area. Do not charge the
battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.
Only do a slow charge (5 A or
less). Charging at a quicker rate is
dangerous. The battery may explode, causing personal injuries.
NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the
engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
373
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Checking and replacing fuses
Type B fuses—When any of the fuses are
blown, contact your Toyota dealer.
Type A fuses can be pulled out by the
pull−out tool. The location of the pull−out
tool is shown in the illustration.
If you are not sure whether the fuse has
blown, try replacing the suspected fuse
with one that you know is good.
Good
If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse
into the clip.
Blown
Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid.
Type A
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work, check the
fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,
they must be replaced.
See “Fuse locations” on page 349 in Section 7−1 for locations of the fuses.
Good
Blown
Turn the ignition switch and inoperative
component off. Pull the suspected fuse
straight out and check it.
Determine which fuse may be causing the
problem. The lid of the fuse box shows
the name of the circuit for each fuse. See
page 387 in Section 8 for the functions
controlled by each circuit.
Type B
374
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you do not have a spare fuse, in an
emergency you can pull out the “MIR
HTR”, “CIG” or “A/C” fuse, which may be
dispensable for normal driving, and use it
if its amperage rating is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one that is lower, but as close
to the rating as possible. If the amperage
is lower than that specified, the fuse
might blow out again but this does not
indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and
return the substitute to its original clip.
It is a good idea to purchase a set of
spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies.
Replacing the wiper blades
Adding washer fluid
If the new fuse immediately blows out,
there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as
soon as possible.
If any washer does not work, the low
windshield washer fluid level warning
light comes on, the washer tank may be
empty. Add washer fluid.
You should normalize the power window
and moon roof if they do not operate automatically or the jam protection function
does not operate correctly after replacing
blown fuses. To normalize the power window and moon roof, see “Power windows”
on page 41 and “Electric moon roof” on
page 52 in Section 1−2.
You may use plain water as washer fluid.
However, in cold areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This
product is available at your Toyota dealer
and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to
mix with water.
CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in
place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire.
NOTICE
When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the wiper blades may be worn
or cracked, requiring replacement.
To remove the wiper blade from the arm,
pull the blade in the direction of the arrow
while squeezing the clip.
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
NOTICE
Be careful not to scratch the glass
surface with the wiper frame.
375
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Checking the headlight aim
(with discharge headlight)—
Remove the cover clips with a Phillips−
head screwdriver and remove the covers.
Removing clip
1: Vertical movement adjusting bolt 1
2: Vertical movement adjusting bolt 2
Before checking the headlight aim:
Remove and install the cover clip and
cover as shown in the following illustrations.
1. Be sure that the body around the headlight is not deformed.
2. Park the vehicle on a level spot.
3. The driver gets into the driver’s seat
and puts the vehicle in a state readying for a driving (with a full tank).
4. Bounce the vehicle several times.
Installing clip
376
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—Adjusting the vertical aiming
Replacing light bulbs—
The following illustrations show how to
gain access to the bulbs. When replacing
a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and
light switch are off. Use bulbs with the
wattage ratings given in the table.
The high mounted stoplight consists of a
number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn
out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not
1. Turn the vertical movement adjusting
bolt 1 in either direction using a Phillips−head screwdriver. At this time,
keep the turning direction and number
of turns in mind.
2. Turn the vertical movement adjusting
bolt 2 the same number of turns and
in the same direction as step 1 using
a Phillips−head screwdriver.
replace the light bulbs while they
are hot.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and require special handling.
They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb
only by its plastic or metal case.
Do not touch the glass part of a
bulb with bare hands.
377
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicles with discharge headlights—
Do not touch the high−intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage
socket when the headlights are
turned on. An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged
and could result in serious injury or
death by electric shock.
Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam headlight bulbs,
connectors, power supply circuits,
or related components. Doing so
could result in electric shock and
serious injury or death. Call your
Toyota dealer for headlight repair or
servicing, including replacement of
bulbs and bulb disposal.
The inside of the lens of exterior lights
such as headlights may temporarily fog up
when the lens becomes wet in the rain or
in a car wash. This is not a problem
because the fogging is caused by the
temperature difference between the outside
and inside of the lens, just like the
windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if
there is a large drop of water on the
inside of the lens, or if there is water
pooled inside the light, contact your
Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.
378
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Light bulbs
Bulb
No.
W
Type
Headlights
(low)
Discharge
bulbs
Halogen bulbs
D2R
35
A
9006
51
B
Headlights
(high)
9005
60
C
Front fog lights
9006
51
B
Front turn
signal/parking
lights
3457A
27/7
D
Front side
marker lights
W5W
5
E
Rear turn signal
lights
469
21
D
Stop/tail lights
7443
21/5
E
Rear side
marker lights
194
3.8
E
Tail lights
194
3.8
E
Back−up lights
921
16
E
License plate
lights
194
3.8
E
Interior light
W5W
5
E
—Headlights, front fog, front
turn signal/parking, front side
marker, tail and back−up
lights, and LED∗ type high
mounted stoplight
If either the left or right headlights,
front fog, front turn signal/parking,
front side marker, tail or back−up lights, or LED∗ type high mounted stoplight
burns out, contact your Toyota dealer.
Light bulbs
Bulb
No.
W
Type
Front personal
lights
W5W
5
E
Rear personal
lights
W5W
5
E
NOTICE
Vanity lights
7065
1.4
F
Glove box light
74
1.2
E
Door courtesy
lights
168
5
E
Do not try to replace the headlights,
front fog, front turn signal/parking,
front side marker, tail or back−up
light bulbs by yourself. You may damage the vehicle.
Trunk light
2825
4.8
E
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
—Rear turn signal, stop/tail
and rear side marker lights
∗:
Light−emitting Diode
D2R discharge bulbs
HB4 halogen bulbs
HB3 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Double end bulbs
379
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
—License plate lights
a: Rear turn signal light
b: Stop/tail light
c: Rear side marker light
Use a flathead screwdriver.
380
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
8
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
382
382
383
383
386
387
381
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Dimensions and weights
Engine
Model:
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE)
Overall length
mm (in.)
5010 (197.2)
Overall width
mm (in.)
1850
(72.8)
Overall height∗
mm (in.)
1485
(58.5)
Wheelbase
mm (in.)
2820 (111.0)
Bore and stroke, mm (in.):
94.0 83.0 (3.70 3.27)
Front tread
mm (in.)
1581
(62.2)
Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):
3456 (210.9)
Rear tread
mm (in.)
1570
(61.8)
Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage)
kg (lb.)
395
(870)
Towing capacity (trailer weight + cargo weight)
kg (lb.)
454 (1000)
∗:
Unladen vehicle
382
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Type:
6 cylinder V type 4 cycle, gasoline
Fuel
Service specifications
Fuel type:
Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
ENGINE
Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):
70 (18.5, 15.4)
Spark plug gap, mm (in.):
1.1 (0.043)
Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 5W−30
Spark plug type:
DENSO
FK20HR11
NOTICE
Use only above spark plugs. Do not
adjust gaps for engine performance or
smooth driveability.
ENGINE LUBRICATION
Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.
qt.):
With filter
6.1 (6.4, 5.4)
Without filter
5.7 (6.0, 5.0)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.
Outside temperature
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil.
383
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
COOLING SYSTEM
BATTERY
Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
8.3 (8.8, 7.3)
Open voltage∗ at 20C (68F):
12.6—12.8 V
Fully charged
12.2—12.4 V
Half charged
11.8—12.0 V
Discharged
Coolant type:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
used in your Toyota vehicle at factory
fill. In order to avoid technical problems,
only use “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non−silicate, non−amine,
non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with
long−life hybrid organic acid technology.
(Coolant with long−life hybrid organic
acid technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for
further details.
∗:
Voltage that is checked 20 minutes
after the key is removed (vehicles with
key cylinder−type ignition switch) or the
engine is turned off (vehicles with
smart key system) with all the lights
turned off.
Charging rates:
5 A max.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,
Imp. qt.):
Up to 3.5 (3.7, 3.1)
Fluid type:
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
Change automatic transmission fluid only
as necessary.
384
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Generally, it is necessary to change
automatic transmission fluid only if your
vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions
listed
in your
“Scheduled
Maintenance
Guide”
or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When
changing the automatic transmission fluid,
use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATF
JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring
maximum transaxle performance.
Notice: Using automatic transmission
fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF
WS” may cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission
of your vehicle.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
BRAKES
Minimum pedal clearance when depressed
with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)
with the engine running, mm (in.):
77 (3.0)
Pedal free play, mm (in.):
1—6 (0.04—0.24)
Pad wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)
Lining wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)
Parking brake adjustment when depressed
with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf):
9—11 clicks
Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
STEERING
Wheel free play:
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Power steering fluid type:
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII
or III
385
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tires
Tire size and cold tire inflation pressure:
Front and rear
Tire size
kPa (kgf/cm 2 or bar, psi)
Tire inflation pressure
Wheel size
Under 160 km/h (99 mph)
Over 160 km/h (99 mph)
P215/60R16 94V
200 (2.0, 29)
240 (2.4, 35)
16 6 1/2JJ
P215/55R17 93V
220 (2.2, 32)
260 (2.6, 38)
17 7JJ
When driving under the above vehicle load conditions at sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in countries
where such speeds are permitted by−law, inflate the front and rear tires to 280 kPa (2.8 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 41 psi) provided
that it does not exceed the maximum cold tire pressure molded on the tire sidewall.
Spare
kPa (kgf/cm 2 or bar, psi)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
Wheel size
P215/60R16 94V
200 (2.0, 29)
16 6 1/2JJ
P215/55R17 93V
220 (2.2, 32)
17 7JJ
T155/70R17 110M
420 (4.2, 60)
17 4T
Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):
103 (10.5, 76)
NOTE: For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on pages 361 through 369 in Section 7−2.
386
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Fuses
6. INJ 15 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system
7. STOP NO.1 15 A: Multiplex communication system
8. STR LOCK 25 A: Steering lock system
9. IMMOBI 7.5 A: Smart key system
10. AMP 30 A: Audio system
11. TURN/HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights
12. IG2 25 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system
Instrument panel
13. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
Fuses (type A)
1. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
2. STOP NO.2 7.5 A: Stop lights, high
mounted stoplight, vehicle stability control system, anti−lock brake system
3. RADAR CC 7.5 A: Vehicle stability
control system
4. HEAD RH LWR 15
headlight (low beam)
Engine compartment
A:
Right−hand
14. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system
15. DOOR NO.1 25 A: Multiplex communication system
16. AM2 7.5 A: Starter system
17. RAD NO.1 15 A: Audio system, center
display, navigation system
18. ECU−B 10 A: Center display, multiplex
communication system
5. HEAD LH LWR 15 A: Left−hand headlight (low beam)
387
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
19. DOME 7.5 A: Gauges and meters,
clock, front personal lights, door courtesy lights, garage door opener, rear
personal lights, trunk light
20. S−HORN 7.5 A: Horn
21. WASHER 20 A: Windshield washer
22. A/F 25 A: Air fuel ratio sensor
23. HEAD RH UPR 15
headlight (high beam)
A:
Right−hand
33. P/W 25 A: Power window, driving position memory system
34. FUEL OPN 7.5 A: Fuel filler door
opener
35. AM1 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, starting system, ignition system
43. HTR 7.5 A: Air conditioning system,
instrument panel lights, electric cooling
fan
44. A/C COMP 7.5 A: Air conditioning system
45. S−HTR 20 A: Air conditioning system
46. GAUGE NO.1 10 A: Back−up lights,
navigation system, emergency flashers
36. A/C 7.5 A: Air conditioning system
47. WIP 30 A: Windshield wipers
24. HEAD LH UPR 15 A: Left−hand headlight (high beam)
37. DOOR NO.2 25 A: Multiplex communication system
48. RR S/SHADE 10 A: Rear electric sunshade
25. HORN 10 A: Horn
38. S/ROOF 30 A: Electric moon roof
26. EFI NO.1 25 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, fuel pump
39. TAIL 10 A: Parking lights, license plate
lights, tail lights, front and rear side
marker lights
27. RR DOOR 25 A: Power window (for
rear right passenger)
28. RL DOOR 25 A: Power window (for
rear left passenger)
40. PANEL 7.5 A: Seat heaters, navigation
system, emergency flasher, electronically controlled automatic transmission
system, glove box light, instrument
panel lights, power outlets
49. IGN 10 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, SRS airbag system, front passenger occupant classification system,
smart key system, starter system
29. FR DOOR 25 A: Power window (front
passenger), driving position memory
system
41. ECU IG NO.1 10 A: Center display,
shift lock control system, electric moon
roof, multiplex communication system
30. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights
42. ECU IG NO.2 10 A: Anti−lock brake
system, dynamic laser cruise control
system, automatic headlight leveling
system, vehicle stability control system,
multiplex communication system
31. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis system
32. MPX−B 7.5 A: Multiplex communication
system
388
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
50. GAUGE NO.2 7.5 A: Gauges and meters, center display
51. ECU−ACC 7.5 A: Power rear view mirrors, center display, shift lock system,
multiplex communication system
52. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter
53. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets
54. RADIO NO.2 7.5 A: Audio system,
navigation system
55. MIR HTR 10 A: Outside rear view mirror defoggers
Fuses (type B)
56. ALT 120 A (vehicles without compass)/140 A (vehicles with compass):
Charging system, “RR DEF”, “ABS/VSC
NO.2” “HEATER”, “ABS/VSC NO.1”,
“RDI FAN”, “WASHER” and “S−HORN”
fuses
57. MAIN 40 A: Headlights
58. ST/AM2 30 A: Starter system
59. HEATER 50 A: Air conditioning system
60. ABS/VSC NO.1 50 A: Anti−lock brake
system, vehicle stability control system
61. RDI FAN 50 A: Electric cooling fan
62. ABS/VSC NO.2 30 A: Anti−lock brake
system, vehicle stability control system
63. RR DEF 50 A: Rear windshield defogger, outside rear view mirror defoggers
389
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
390
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
9
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.
OWNERS
Reporting safety defects for u.s. owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
391
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc.
(Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety
Hotline
toll−free
at
1−888−327−4236 (TTY: 1−800−424−9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
392
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
This quick reference guide provides you with information on Dynamic Laser Cruise Control
Vehicle−to−Vehicle Distance Control Mode. Prior to use of this system, you should be thoroughly familiar
with this system, referring to “Dynamic Laser Cruise Control” in Section 1−7, Owner’s Manual in
conjunction with this quick reference guide.
Dynamic Laser Cruise Control Operation
The laser radar sensor in this system primarily detects the reflectors of the vehicle ahead of you to determine the presence of the
vehicle and the vehicle−to−vehicle distance. The detection range of the sensor is about 120 m (400 ft.) ahead.
If no vehicle is detected ahead of you:
Your cruising speed is maintained at the preset speed from about 40 km/h (25 mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph).
If a vehicle is detected ahead of you:
Your cruising speed changes in proportion to the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain an appropriate distance from your vehicle
to the vehicle ahead.
If the vehicle ahead is out of the detection range, your cruising speed will be gradually increased up to the preset speed, and your
vehicle resumes fixed−speed cruising.
If the vehicle ahead decelerates abruptly or other vehicles cut in ahead of you, your vehicle may be too close to the vehicle ahead
of you. If this occurs, the display flashes and beeps. (Approach warning)
The dynamic laser cruise control should be used on roads in which sufficient vehicle−to−vehicle distance will be ensured
(such as on freeways).
−1−
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation Requirements
f
Cruising from about 40 km/h (25 mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph)
O001qrg
The wipers are not operating at all or operating
intermittently (including the same wiper operation
in the “AUTO” position).
The selector lever is in the “D” position or the
shift range position is in the “4” (forth range)
or “5” (fifth range) in “S” mode.
Even if these requirements are met, the system may not
operate properly under certain conditions such as bad
weather. See Owner’s Manual for Complete Information.
−2−
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cautions
Do not rely too much on dynamic laser cruise control. Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control has its limitations.
Always remain aware of the distance from the vehicle ahead and other vehicles. If necessary, depress the brake pedal to
ensure sufficient distance.
Dynamic laser cruise control is not a collision−avoidance system.
If necessary, depress the brake pedal to ensure sufficient distance.
Dynamic laser cruise control should not be used in the following conditions:
In bad weather (such as rain, fog, snow, sandstorms)
O002qrg
In direct sunlight from the front
Raindrops or snowflakes get in the laser radar sensor glass
On the roads in heavy traffic or at sharp bends
On slippery road surfaces (icy or snow−covered road surfaces)
On steep downhill slopes
Continual acceleration or deceleration (such as on busy traffic)
On roads with steep and short inclines and declines
In any conditions of the above, an appropriate vehicle−to−vehicle distance control
may not be attained.
This system is not provided to justify careless driving.
Always remain aware of the distance from the vehicle ahead and other vehicles.
The dynamic laser cruise control should not be used when exiting from,
or when entering or merging onto a freeway.
When you are following a slower moving vehicle and exiting, the sensor
does not detect the vehicle and will accelerate to preset speed.
O003qrg
−3−
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cautions
If other vehicles are driving outside of the laser radar detection range, a delay in the detection of the vehicle cutting in
at short range or detection failure of the motorcycle running on the side of the same lane will occur. In this case, the
dynamic laser cruise control system will not function properly.
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead cannot be accurately detected in the following cases:
The vehicle ahead has higher ground clearance, which means that the placement of the reflectors is in a higher position.
The rear section of the vehicle ahead is extremely dirty.
The vehicle ahead or other vehicles around you are flinging up water or snow.
Excessive exhaust gas (black smoke) is coming from the vehicle ahead or other vehicles around you, obscuring your front
view.
Protective film is attached to the reflectors on the vehicle ahead, or reflectors are not installed on the vehicle ahead or are
damaged.
Heavy luggage is loaded on top of your rear seats.
The laser radar sensor automatically detects dirt if dirt is sticking to the sensor glass of your vehicle.
However, in some cases dirt may not be detected. At this time warning display does not operate and an appropriate
vehicle−to−vehicle distance cannot be maintained. Continue driving with due care to the vehicle ahead.
Dynamic laser cruise control does not operate when the vehicle is at a stop or is driving very slowly.
Pay special attention to the very slow vehicle at the end of the line in heavy traffic or at the toll gate.
Turn off the main switch when dynamic laser cruise control is not in use.
The approach warning may not turn on even if the vehicle drives closer to the vehicle ahead in the following conditions:
Your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are cruising at almost the same speed.
The vehicle ahead is cruising at a faster speed than yours. (The distance between the vehicles will become longer.)
The accelerator pedal is depressed, immediately after the release of the accelerator pedal or immediately after the speed
setting.
Depending on the road configuration (curved roads) or your vehicle condition (steering wheel maneuvering, position in
the lane), vehicles in other lanes or surrounding objects will be detected.
−4−
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
See Owner’s Manual for Complete Information.
Warning Display
If dynamic laser cruise control detects bad weather or malfunction of the system, the master warning light comes on and the alarm
sounds, and one of the warning codes “C1”, “C2” or “E3” will appear on the display.
Warning code
“CRUISE”
indicator light
Master Warning
Light
C1
Conditions
Laser radar sensor glass is dirty
Wipers are operating at high or low speeds
O004qrg
C2
E3∗
Warning code
∗:
Direct sunlight from front
It is difficult to make a measurement
because of bad weather
System malfunction has been detected
“CRUISE” indicator light also flashes.
If a warning message appears on the display, take the appropriate measure referring to Section 1−7, “Owner’s Manual”.
Approach Warning
Dynamic laser cruise control and approach warning do not operate when the vehicle ahead is
at a stop or is driving much slower than your vehicle. Use caution for the vehicle at the end
of the line in heavy traffic or at the tollgate, the vehicle at a stop and the very slow vehicle.
If your vehicle approaches the vehicle ahead because of insufficient braking when the vehicle ahead
decelerates abruptly or when another vehicle cuts in ahead of you, the display flashes and beeps.
Depress the brake pedal to slow down, ensuring sufficient vehicle−to−vehicle distance.
−5−
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
O006
Operation Procedure
The operation procedure is shown as follows. For the detailed information, see Section 1−7 in the “Owner’s Manual”.
Setting
1
Push the “ON−OFF” button to turn on the system. The “CRUISE” and “READY” indicator lights in the instrument cluster come on.
O007
O008
2
Bring your vehicle to the desired speed.
3
Press the control lever downward in the “− SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed.
If a vehicle is detected ahead of you: Your cruising speed changes in proportion to the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain an
appropriate distance from your vehicle to the vehicle ahead.
If there was no vehicle ahead, your cruising speed will be gradually increased up to the preset speed.
If no vehicle is detected ahead of you: Your cruising speed is maintained at the preset speed.
Cancelling
To stop the operation: Pressing the “ON−OFF” button.
To stop the operation temporarily:
Pull the lever in the “CANCEL” direction.
Depressing the brake pedal.
O009
O010
To resume follow−up cruising or cruising at fixed speed,
press the control lever upward and release it.
See Owner’s Manual for Complete Information.
−6−
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation Procedure
Acceleration/Deceleration
To accelerate: Depress the accelerator pedal. (When you release the accelerator pedal, follow−up cruising or fixed speed
cruising resumes.) If there was no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will accelerate gradually to the preset speed. At this time,
depressing the accelerator pedal or pressing the control lever upward and releasing it will accelerate quickly.
To decelerate: Depress the brake pedal. (Even when you release the brake pedal, dynamic laser cruise control does not return
to follow−up cruising or fixed speed cruising. Press the control lever upward to resume follow−up−cruising or fixed speed
cruising.)
Changing the preset speed
To increase
the preset speed
Using the control lever:
1
Press the control lever upward or downward.
Press the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction to increase the preset speed.
Press the control lever downward in the “− SET” direction to decrease the preset
speed.
O011
To decrease
the preset speed
The displayed speed will increase or decrease every 5 mph.
2
Release the control lever when the display shows the desired preset speed.
Using the accelerator and brake pedals:
1
Depress the accelerator or brake pedal to attain the desired speed.
2
Press the control lever downward in the “− SET” direction and release the lever.
−7−
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
O008
Operation Procedure
To restore the previous control
If the preset speed has been cancelled, when you press the lever upward in the “+ RES” direction while “READY” shows up on
the instrument cluster and at a vehicle speed of about more than 40 km/h (25 mph), the speed set prior to cancellation will be
restored.
O012
Changing vehicle−to−vehicle distance setting
You can select one of the following vehicle−to−vehicle distances: LONG, MIDDLE or SHORT. Each time you push the distance
switch briefly, the setting changes from LONG to MIDDLE to SHORT and then back to LONG. You can confirm the setting on
the display.
LONG
MIDDLE
SHORT
O005qrg
O013
O014
O015
See Owner’s Manual for Complete Information.
−8−
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
In addition to the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode described in this quick reference guide, dynamic laser cruise
control has conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising at fixed speeds. For the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, see Section 1−7 in the “Owner’s Manual”.
Changing to the conventional (fixed speed) control mode
1
Each mode display
The control system in the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control
mode differs from the one in the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode.
When using dynamic laser cruise control, make sure which
mode is selected.
Push the “ON−OFF” button to turn on the system. The
“CRUISE” and “READY” indicator lights in the instrument
cluster come on.
O007
Displays in the instrument cluster:
Push the control lever in the “MODE” direction for longer
than 1 second to change to conventional cruise control
mode. The “NORM.” indicator light in the instrument
cluster comes on.
In Ready State
2
Fixed Speed Control Mode
O012
O017
In Control
Vehicle−to−Vehicle Distance
Control Mode
O018
O019
O016
−9−
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Foreword
Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and
quality construction of each vehicle we build.
This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants
follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. For
important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.
When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete
satisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:
When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:
U.S. OWNERS:
Toyota Customer Experience Center
Toll−free:1−800−331−4331
Hawaii:
Servco Automotive Customer Services
Toll−free:1−888−272−5515
When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:
CANADIAN OWNERS:
Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre
Toll−free:1−888−TOYOTA−8 or 1−888−869−6828
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy of
continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may
find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
Please access our websites for further information.
The U.S. mainland
www.toyota.com
Hawaii
www.toyotahawaii.com
Canada
www.toyota.ca

2006 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION
All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota
Motor Corporation.
i
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
aU−3
Quick index
If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on . . . . . . . . 145
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Tips for driving during break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Complete index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO TAG
Gas station information
Fuel type:
UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. For improved vehicle performance, use premium unleaded gasoline
with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher.
See page 266 for detailed information.
Fuel tank capacity:
70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 Imp. gal.)
Engine oil:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.
See page 357 for detailed information.
Tire information: See pages 361 through 369.
Tire inflation pressure: See page 386.
Publication No. OM41418U
Part No. 01999-41418
Printed in Japan 01−0608−00
(
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
U)
Z
Important information about this manual
Safety and vehicle damage warnings
Safety symbol
Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle damage warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to
avoid possible injury or damage.
The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are
used in this manual are explained as follows:
CAUTION
This is a
injury to
informed
order to
others.
warning against anything which may cause
people if the warning is ignored. You are
about what you must or must not do in
reduce the risk of injury to yourself and
When you see the safety symbol
shown above, it means: “Do not...”;
“Do not do this”; or “Do not let this
happen”.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning
is ignored. You are informed about what you must or
must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of
damage to your vehicle and its equipment.
ii
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Important information about your Toyota
The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the event of
a collision. None of these systems, either individually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in the event of
collision. However, the more you know about these systems
and how to use them properly, the greater your chances become of surviving an accident without death or serious injury.
Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of
the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear
seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be
secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for
their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with, and
be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes for
them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing the risk
of head, chest and knee injuries by preventing contact of the
head, chest and knee with interior portions of the vehicle.
Occupant restraint systems
Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time to
read Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In terms
of helping you understand how you can receive the maximum
benefit of the occupant restraint systems this vehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual is the most important Section for you and your family to read.
Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concerning
seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint systems of
this vehicle and some potential hazards you should be aware
of. These systems work together along with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide occupant restraint in
the event of a crash. The effect of each system is enhanced
when it is used properly and together with other systems. No
single occupant restraint system can, by itself, provide you or
your family with the equal level of restraint which these systems can provide when used together. That is why it is important for you and your family to understand the purpose
and proper use of each of these systems and how they relate to each other.
iii
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with
tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS airbags
makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources of
death or serious injury if an occupant is too close to an
airbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body has
been placed between the occupant and the airbag at the time
of deployment. This is just one example of how the instructions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will help ensure
proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and increase
the safety they can provide to you and your family in the
event of an accident.
Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section
1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your time
of ownership of this vehicle.
Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain
aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving
and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Besides storing
data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to record
data in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an
Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a
crash or a near car crash event, this device may record
some or all of the following information:
Engine speed
Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
Vehicle speed
To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
Position of the transmission selector lever
Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seat
belts or not
Driver’s seat position
Front passenger’s occupant classification
SRS airbag deployment data
iv
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SRS airbag system diagnostic data
If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control
(VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may contain
another EDR. There are a variety of driving situations which
include activating the VSC under which the VSC EDR will
record certain information. The VSC EDR may record some
or all of the following information:
Behavior of the vehicle
Steering wheel angle
Vehicle speed
To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
To what extent the brake pedal was applied
To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of the
4 wheels
Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose
of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data
recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as
conversation between passengers.
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a
third party except when:
An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing
company for a leased vehicle) is obtained
Officially requested by the police or other authorities
Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit
Ordered by the court
However, if necessary Toyota will:
Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety
performance
Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes
without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only
when it is deemed necessary
Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non−Toyota organization for research purposes
v
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Important health and safety
information about your Toyota
New vehicle warranty
Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited
warranties:
New vehicle warranty
Emission control systems warranty
Others
For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Warranty
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
CAUTION
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. In addition,
oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well
as waste produced by component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.
Your responsibility for
maintenance
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of
these maintenance requirements. Also included in Section
6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
vi
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Accessories, spare parts and
modification of your Toyota
Installation of a mobile two−way
radio system
A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessories
for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You
should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and
is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine Toyota
products. Modification with non−genuine Toyota products
could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may
even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting from the modification may not
be covered under warranty.
As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in your
vehicle could affect electronic systems such as multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system,
electronic throttle control system, cruise control system, dynamic laser cruise control system, anti−lock brake system,
traction control system, vehicle stability control system, SRS
airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to
check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or
special instructions regarding installation.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling and disposal restrictions may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate.
These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
Spark ignition system of your
Toyota
The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference−Causing Equipment Standard.
vii
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Smart key system
Scrapping of your Toyota
Users of any electrical medical devices such as implanted
pacemakers should consult the manufacturer of the device
for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on
the operation of such medical devices. For details, see
“Keys” on page 14 and “Smart key system” on page 27 in
Section 1−2.
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped
with the airbags and pretensioners left as they are, this may
cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems
of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and
disposed of by the qualified service shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you dispose of your vehicle.
Tires and loading on your
Toyota
Leak detection pump
This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This
check is done approximately five hours after the engine is
turned off. So you may hear sound coming from underneath
the luggage compartment for several minutes. It does not
indicate a malfunction.
Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and excess load may result in the deterioration of steering
ability and braking ability, leading to an accident.
Check the tire inflation pressure periodically and be
sure to stay with the load limits given in this Owner’s
Manual. For details about tire inflation pressure and
load limits, see pages 289 and 361.
viii
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
You should know as much about the quality and
importance of proper maintenance of your new
vehicle as the people who built it.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual
tells you how to maintain your vehicle and
enables you to correctly perform your own
maintenance.
The best way to keep your new vehicle in top
running order is to maintain it properly from
the moment you drive it off the showroom
floor.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is
packed with literally everything you need to
know to perform your own maintenance in
virtually every area of your new vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance procedures for the engine,
chassis, body, electrical system, and more,
are clearly explained and illustrated.
Periodic maintenance and tune−up
Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to prevent small problems from growing into larger ones later on. The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenance is required and clearly explains how to do the
work yourself step−by−step.
Areas covered include such things as spark plug replacement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil
and filter replacement.
Where to obtain the
Repair Manual
The repair manual for AVALON may be purchased from any Toyota dealer or the Material
Distribution Center. To purchase the repair
manual, please contact your Toyota dealer or call
the Material Distribution Center toll−free at
1−800−622−2033.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU PLEASE BUCKLE UP
Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.
Toyota belts are:
Comfortable
Easy to use
Convenient
We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.
U
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising